Home

Arbitrary Waveform Generator

Contents

1. Nj NOTE Leave the same setup for the next test Single Advance Equipment Oscilloscope function generator Preparation 1 Use the same preparations as for step advance except change mode to single sequence advance 2 Change function generator run mode to triggered 3 Change Oscilloscope configuration to single Test Procedure 1 Press the manual trigger button on the function generator and observe that one cycle waveform advances through the sequence table repeatedly with each external trigger signal Note that you need to press the Single mode on the oscilloscope for each trigger advance Test Results Pass Fail 2 Remove the cable from 397 channel 1 and connect to chan 2 3 Repeat the test procedure as above for chan 2 Test Results Pass Fail 6 17 397 User Manual Modulated Waveforms Characteristics FSK Equipment Oscilloscope LeCroy LT342 fitted with jitter package function generator Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 0 5 ms Memory 250k Sampling Rate 50MS s at least Trace A View Jitter Type FREQ CLK Trigger source Channel 2 positive slope Amplitude 1V div 2 Connect 397 Channel 1 outputto the oscilloscope input chan 1 3 Connect the 397 SYNC output to the oscilloscope input chan 2 4 Configure the function generator as follow
2. Keyword Parameter Form Default in Bold Notes RAMP DELay 0 0 99 9 TRANSition LEADing 60 0 99 9 TRAiling 30 0 99 9 GAUSsian EXPonent 20 10 200 SINC NCYCIe 10 4 100 EXPonential EXPonent 1 20 00 20 00 DC AMPLitude 100 100 100 FM DATA arbitrary block DEViation 10e6 100e 3 125e6 FUNCtion MODE FIXed USER SHAPe SINusoidal TRlangle SQUare RAMP FREQuency 1e3 1e 3 100e3 RASTer 1e6 1e 3 2e6 STATe OFF ON TRIGger MODE CONTinuous TRIGgered GATed SLOPe POSitive NEGative FSK FREQuency RASTer 80e6 100e 3 125e6 STATe OFF ON MODE HOP RAMP RAMP TIME 1e 3 10e 6 1 5 10 Remote Programming Reference SCPI Syntax and Styles Table 5 1 Model 397 SCPI Commands List Summary continued Keyword Parameter Form Default in Bold Notes SWEep FREQuency STOP 20e6 100e 3 125 e6 STATe OFF ON TIME 1e 3 1e 3 1000 DIRection UP DOWN SPACing LiNear LOGarithmic TRIGger CONTinuous TRIGgered GATed MODE CONTinuous TRIGgered GATed SLOPe POSitive NEGative MARKer 64e6 100e 3 125e6 AM STATe OFF ON TRACe DATA arbitrary block DEFine 1 1 2048 16 16 4193304 Even number divisible by 4 DELete NAME 1 1 2048 ALL SELect 1 1 2048 SEGMent DATA binary block
3. Channel 1 Output Channel 2 Output SYNC Output Front Panel Indicators Front Panel Controls Table of Contents 397 User Manual Clu EE 1 15 AC LINE m eden sie 1 15 e E EE 1 15 RUN Modes X Cii daa dtt butter a p erbe ett I lina 1 15 Moni Pee E 1 16 Triggered Mode ER ee E i 1 16 Gated MOO E 1 16 Burst Modes e et id diet tint aei 1 16 ize Agility car 1 16 SWE EE 1 17 cl d CT E m ENS 1 17 piece 1 17 FW BEE 1 17 e Ue IUe Me Rc IEEE 1 18 Standard Fixed VWavelolTts s sinet dalt if 1 18 Arbitrary User WaVvelorrtis erroe te 1 18 Sequenced Waveforms occcccccnccnnccnnncnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnninninnnis 1 18 A EE 1 20 FIGS fof o tO Bem int CD 1 20 Programming PMCS sieur AAA po Up ad AR AAA a da 1 21 2 Configuring the Instrument sssssssssssnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nna 2 1 ECETIA AA Det ettet sete c ER Re etat e e b dia co das 2 3 Unpacking and Initial Inspection sssseeett nnne 2 3 DAISY F FECAUMOMS Hc as ncngee cs aeryer RE 2 3 Performance CHECKS iod dodo it ia 2 4 Power Req irernents irc e E ere For dei eite E reda Red 2 4 Grounding Requiem EEN 2 4 Long Term Storage or Repackaging for Shipm
4. 6 20 Maintenance and Performance Checks Modulated Waveforms Characteristics FM Std Waveforms Equipment Oscilloscope LeCroy LT342 fitted with jitter package Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 0 5 ms Memory 250k Trace A View Jitter Type FREQ CLK Trigger source Channel 2 positive slope Amplitude 1V div 2 Connect 397 Channel 1 output to the oscilloscope input chan 1 3 Connect the 397 SYNC output to the oscilloscope input chan 2 4 Configure the 397 channels 1 2 as follows Reset Modulation Mode FM ON Deviation 60MS s Sync On Output On Test Procedure 1 Verify FM operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Sine Frequency 1kHz Max A 1 468MHz Min A 531kHz Test Results Pass Fail 2 Modify 397 modulating waveform to triangle then square and ramp and verify FM waveforms as selected Test Results Pass Fail 3 Remove the cable from 397 channel 1 and connect to chan 2 4 Repeat the test procedure as above for channel 2 Test Results Pass Fail 6 21 397 User Manual FM Arb Waveforms Equipment Oscilloscope LeCroy LT342 fitted with jitter package Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 0 5 ms Memory 250k Trace A View Jitter Type FREQ CLK Trigger source Channel 2 positive
5. D ADrivers v Don t search will choose the driver to install Choose this option to select the device driver from a list Windows does not guarantee that the driver you choose will be the best match for your hardware Figure 2 8 Choose Your Search and installation Options 2 12 Configuring the Instrument y Selecting a Remote interface Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard The wizard has finished installing the software for E USB Serial Port e Click Finish to close the wizard Figure 2 9 New Hardware Found and Software installed The process above detected a USB device and installed the software for it then it has assigned a Serial Port address to the USB post In fact this ends the process unless you want to verify that the drivers and the port are correctly assigned on your PC To make sure your USB port and the Fluke 397 configured correctly compare your Device Manager to the example in Figure 2 10 Nj Note Configuring your USB setting does not automatically select the USB as your active remote interface Setting a remote interface is done from the Select interface menu Information how to select and Interface is given hereinbefore 2 13 397 User Manual Device Manager Action View Help gt 2 lo 2 aa 3 Hm m Y Y ae Keyboards Mice and other pointing devices Modems Monitors Network adapters PCMCIA
6. 3 o 900000 O Me PLD ai c yy 6 OO sch eee gt IEEE 488 O JO rove bad XX ree CON A SAFETY WARNING SEA TRIG FSK IN OTECTION AGAINST FIRE HAZARD O O O Q O Cj fee By NS DISCONNECT RRECT RATING N BEFORE REFLACING FUSE PARTS ATS ARE CONTAINED gt O AUTOMATIC ER REFER SERVICE TO oe ACVOLTAGE GEN MES e OQ Q D e SELECTION E Q La LNK LAN ACT USB rf IN MASTER SLAVE O O O Gu PORER T0 5A 250V 9 o m nr 25 d FLUKE CORPORATION GU C www fluke com MADE INISRAEL AM IN TRIG FSK IN Figure 1 7 Model 397 Rear Panel This input accepts signals that amplitude modulates channel 1 2 or both The AM input becomes active only when the AM function is turned on otherwise it has no effect on the output signal In general this input accepts signals that stimulate generation of output waveforms The trigger input is inactive when the generator is in continuous operating mode When placed in trigger gated or burst mode the trigger input is made active and waits for the right condition to trigger the instrument In trigger and burst modes the trigger input is edge sensitive i e it senses transitions from high to low or from low to high The direction of the transition is programmable In gated mode the trigger input is level sensitive i e the generator is gated when the logic level is high and idle
7. Advance Source Defines the trigger source External enables the trigger input Internal disables the trigger input and enables an internal free running trigger generator that automatically triggers the output at programmable intervals Slope Defines edge sensitivity for the trigger input Timer Set the intervals for the internal trigger generator This value is accessible only if you are using the internal trigger generator as the trigger source and Start Positions Defines the start point on the waveform for the trigger signal The start position parameter may serve as a trigger delay generator where the delay is set in number of waveform points You may use the triggered mode to trigger standard arbitrary and sequenced waveforms The Trigger run mode parameters are shown in Figure 3 10 Gated Mode Trigger Parameters Advance Src 12327 s Slope Positive Triggered Timer Gated Start Positions Channel 1 Channel 2 o Burst BRSE MODE SVNC OUT FUNC RRE TYPE BIT 1 RUN TRIG POSITION 9 Figure 3 10 Trigger Run Mode Parameters Using the Instrument Selecting a Run Mode 3 When set to gated mode the 397 output remains at a DC level as long as the rear panel TRIG IN signal remains inactive The gating signal can be programmed to be either active high or active low The Model 397 generates output waveforms as long as the proper level is present at the trig
8. delay rise fall N cycles exp exp amplitude This command turns the AM function on and off ONor 1 will set the AM on OFF or 0 will set the AM off Parameter type Boolean AM Response and default The 397 will return 1 if the AM is on or 0 if the AM is off Default is 0 APPLy SINusoid lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt phase gt Purpose SOURce Subsystem D UP LINear CONTinuous POSitive 64e6 100e 3 125e6 5 10e 3 10 0 4 5 4 5 0 0 360 0 0 360 50 1 99 10 0 99 10 0 99 10 0 99 10 0 99 LO XO XO VO 0 0 99 9 60 0 99 9 30 0 99 9 10 4 100 20 10 200 20 100 100 100 100 100 This command is a high level command that programs the 397 to output sine waveform along with its associated parameters freq sets the output frequency in units of hertz ampl sets the output amplitude in units of volts 397 User Manual lt offs gt sets the output offset in units of volts phase sets the output start phase in units of degrees Parameter type Numeric Parameter range freq 10e3 to 50e6 lt ampl gt 10e 3 to 10 lt offs gt 4 5 to 4 5 phase 0 to 360 APPLy SINusoid Response The 397 will return freq lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt phase gt Default values are 1e6 5 0 0 APPLy TRlangle lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt phase gt Purpose This command is a high level command that programs the 3
9. 2MHz 2MHz 2kHz 100kHz 100kHz 100Hz 1kHz 1kHz 1Hz 1Hz 1Hz 1mHz 6 14 Sequence Operation Automatic Advance 2 3 Maintenance and Performance Checks 6 Sequence Operation Equipment Counter Preparation 1 Configure the counter as follows Function TOTB Measurement Connect the counter channel B to the 397 output Configure the 397 channels 1 2 as follows Reset SCLK 100MS s Waveform Sequence Run Mode Trigger Amplitude 2V Output On Using ArbExplorer prepare and download the following waveform Segments 1to5 Wavelength 100 points Waveform 1 cycle square Using ArbExplorer build and download the following sequence table Step 1 Segment 1 loop 100 000 Step 2 Segment 2 loop 100 000 Step 3 Segment 3 loop 100 000 Step 4 Segment 4 loop 100 000 Step 5 Segment 5 loop 100 000 Test Procedure 1 From ArbExplorer press manual trigger and observe that counter reading is 500 000 counts Reset counter and repeat the test a few times Every time the counter reading should be 500 000 counts exactly Test Results Pass Fail 2 3 Remove the cable from 397 channel 1 and connect to channel 2 Repeat the test procedure as above for channel 2 Test Results Pass Fail 397 User Manual Step Advance Equipment Oscilloscope function generator Preparation 1 Configure the
10. ArbExplorer Feature Highlights FUNC STD RUN TRIG 3 Ydc NC TRIGGERED CEXT TYPE BIT START Pt POSITION o SLOPE POSITIVE om cuz ban sync SSES Te Oia V DIR w OO e Go Ye MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG e e O Ju D CH j SYNC J x CH2 4 y X f VV E DN i E A N A 5on TTL son Figure 1 1 The Model 397 e Four powerful tools in one software package Complete instrument control Waveform pulse and FM composers e Detailed virtual front panels control all 397 functions and modes e Wave composer generates edits and downloads complex waveforms e FM wave composer generates and downloads complex modulating signals e Easy on screen generation of complex pulses using the pulse composer e Equation editor generates waveforms from equations e SCPI command and response editor simulates ATE operation e Translates waveform coordinates from ASCII and other formats e Simplifies generation of complex sequences Various screens of the ArbExplorer program are shown in Figures 1 2 through 1 5 Getting Started 1 ArbExplorer Feature Highlights Multi Instrum i 1 R Anchor 1023 La 32767 Equation Editor ll em H Points S de 16383 g 163840 32768 1023 Points Figure 1 3 ArbExplorer The Wave Composer 1 5 397 User Manual Ex FM Wave Composer gt C Program Files Tabor Electronics WaveCAD 3 21 MotFmDelwhm jol xj File Edi V
11. LeCroy binary format The Open dialog box in Figure 4 16 shows the various file extensions that can be opened into the Wave Composer environment The file that is opened is automatically converted to wav format and can later be saved as a standard ArbExplorer file 4 30 ArbExplorer The Wave Composer Ce 030 Look in ArbExplner das EEE Mot File name Wae Files of type CENTI _ Cancel emm 4 ASCII space delimited asc Comma delimited csv LeCroy format 0 LeCroy format trc Space delimited om Comma delimited t t Figure 4 16 The Open Waveform Dialog Box Save Waveform The Save Waveform Ctrl S command will store your active waveform in your 397 directory as a binary file with an wav extension If this is the first time you save your waveform the Save Waveform As command will be invoked automatically letting you select name location and format for your waveform file Save Waveform As Use the Save Waveform As command the first time you save your waveform It will let you select name location and format for your waveform file Print With this command you may print the active Waveform Window The standard printer dialog box will appear and will let you select printer setup or print the waveform page Exit The Exit command ends the current Wave Composer session and takes you back to the Panels screen If you made changes to your waveform since
12. Square Wave Pulse Rise Fall time Aberration SYNC Marker Output Description Connector Impedance Level Protection Validators Position Width Control Range Resolution Source Current segment is sampled to the end of the segment including repeats and idles there Next trigger advances to next segment Control input is TRIG IN connector Each step of a sequence can be programmed to advance either a automatically Automatic Sequence Advance or b with a trigger Stepped Sequence Advance External rear panel BNC Internal GPIB From 1 to 2048 From 1 to 1 Meg Minimum 1us for more than one loop Front panel BNC Output Off or Normal 500 1 Protected against temporary short to case ground 10mV to 10Vp p into 50 Double into open circuit 3 5 digits 1 25mV 1 000V to 10Vp p 1 5mV 100mV to 999 9mVp p 1 2mV 10mV to 99 99mVp p Offset is independent to amplitude setting as long as lamplitude 2 offset does not exceed 5Vp p O to 4 5V 6 digits 11 50 MHz Elliptic 25 MHZ Elliptic lt 10 ns 10 to 90 of amplitude 596 Provides dual functionality All functions and modes this output generates sync pulse which is synchronous with the output waveform In FM and sweep modes only this output generates a marker at designated sample clock frequencies Front panel BNC 500 1 gt 2V into 500 4V nominal into 10kQ Protected against temporary short to case ground BIT LCOM
13. Wave Commands The Wave commands let you create waveforms on the screen The Wave command has a library of 6 waveforms Sine Triangle Square Exponent Pulse and Noise It also lets you create waveforms using an Equation editor Information how to create waveforms using the Wave commands is given below Creating Waveforms From the Built in Library You can create any waveform from the built in library using the Wave command Clicking on one of the Wave options will open a dialog box An example of the Sine waveform dialog box is shown in Figure 4 25 This dialog box is representative of the rest of the waveforms so other waveforms will not be described Creating Sine Waveforms Use the following procedure to create sine waveforms from the built in library Click on Wave then sine the dialog box as shown in Figure 4 22 will appear You can now start programming parameters that are available in this box Start Point Anchor Defines the first point where the created wave will start Note that if you change the start point the left anchor will automatically adjust itself to the selected start point The example shows start point set at point 200 End Point Anchor Defines where the created waveform will end Note that as you change the end point the right anchor will automatically adjust itself to the selected end point The example shows end point set at point 499 Max Peak Deviation This parameter defines the forward peak
14. will generate FSK modulated waveforms having carrier frequency of 1MHz and shifted frequency of 1 5MHz We ll now check the results at the rear panel sine output connector and compare what we get there to what we see on the front panel Remove the cable from the main output connector and connect to the rear panel SINE OUT connector Here is what you should expect to see when you check this output Carrier waveform is around 1V into 500 carrier frequency is 64MHz Shifted frequency is 96MHz This example will show how to generate FSK modulation using arbitrary waveforms The carrier frequency will be set to 10kHz and the shifted frequency to 25kHz We ll monitor the FSK modulation from the front panel outputs then compare the results to the rear panel sine output connector Before we start with our 397 setting we must know the length of the arbitrary segment that we ll use To simplify matters let s download a 1000 points triangular waveform to the segment 1 You can use ArbExplorer for this purpose Information how to create and download waveforms to the arbitrary memory is given in Chapter 4 From this point it is easy to compute the frequency and the sample clocks that we need for the above example We want the carrier frequency to be 10kHz Bearing in mind that the output frequency is equal to the sample clock frequency divided by the number of points the sample clock must be programmed to be 10MS s 10M 1000 10kHz Using t
15. Click on Back to close NETConfig Firmware Update dialog box and turn off the power to the 397 The next time you power up the instrument the device automatically reboots with the new firmware in effect 397 TE iom Firmware Update are poate gt 00 C0 17 41 00 01 Flash binary image filename D fI397 bin f1397 bin sx File transfer progress Current status Firmware updated successfully en Figure 6 4 Firmware update Path 6 31 397 User Manual 6 32 Appendices Appendix Title Page A Specifications 1 tesa tet TEE A 1 397 User Manual Configuration Output Channels Inter Channel Control Leading Edge Offset Description Offset Units Range Resolution and Accuracy Initial Skew Appendix A Specifications 2 semi independent Channel 2 edge trails channel 1 edge by a programmable number of points Waveform points 0 to 4 Meg points 1 point or 1 sample clock period of channel 2 lt 2ns with sclk divider 1 Channel 2 Sample Clock Divider Description Range Resolution Inter Channel Dependency Separate controls Common Controls Multiple Instrument synchronization Description Leading Edge Offset Description Phase Units Range The sample clock source is common to both channels 1 and 2 The sample clock for the slave channel can be divided down coherently from 1 to 64k 1 to 65 535 1 Output on off amplitude AM offset
16. DMA STATe OFFJON OFF is automatic TYPE WAVE FM SEQuence DATA binary block ADVance AUTOmatic STEP SINGle MIXed SOURce EXTernal INTernal DEFine 1 1 2048 1 1 2048 1 1 1E6 0 0 1 Step segment repeat advance mode DELete ALL 9 397 User Manual Table 5 1 Model 397 SCPI Commands List Summary continued Keyword Parameter Form Default in Bold Notes INITiate MMediately CONTinuous ON OFF TRIGger BURSt STATe OFF ON COUNt 1 1 1E6 SOURce ADVance EXTernal INTernal GATE STATe OFF ON SLOPe POSitive NEGative TIMer 1e3 10e 3 2e6 In Hz units PHASe 0 0 4M 4 point increments IMMediate ARM STATe OFF ON SLOPe STARt POSitive NEGative BREakpoint POSition 0 0 4M 4 point increments RESet SYSTem ERRor Query only VERSion Query only 1999 0 5 12 Remote Programming Reference SCPI Syntax and Styles Table 5 1 Model 397 SCPI Commands List Summary continued Keyword Parameter Form Default in Bold Notes CLS ESE 0 0 255 OPC RST SRE 0 0 255 TRG ESE Query only ESR Query only IDN Query only OPC Query only OPT Query only SRE Query only STB Query only 9 5 13 397 User Manual SOURce Subsystem Keyword Limit SOURCe AM 72
17. Default Low Limit High ON POSitive 0 0 4M ON OFF 1 1 1e6 OFF 0 0 4M POSitive INTernal 1e3 100e 3 2e6 This command will arm the 397 to stop and start generating output waveforms The instrument will stop at a breakpoint set with one of the arm command This mode will operate in continuous run mode only ONor1 will set the arm mode on OFF orO will set the arm mode off Parameter type Discrete ARM Response and default The 397 will return 1 if the arm mode is on or O if the arm mode is off Default value is O 5 42 Remote Programming Reference TRIGger Subsystem ARM SLOPe POSitive NEGative Purpose This command will set the edge sensitivity of which the 397 will stop in arm mode The stop and start commands are applied at the rear panel TRIG IN connector e POSitive will set the positive edge e NEGative will set the negative edge Parameter type Discrete ARM SLOPe Response and default The 397 will return POS or NEG depending on the present setting Default value is POS ARM BREakpoint POSition lt position gt Purpose This command will program the breakpoint position for the arm function e position will set the breakpoint position Parameter type Numeric integer only Parameter range position 0 to 4M in units of waveform points The breakpoint position can be programmed in increments of 4 points minimum ARM BREakpoint POSition Response and default The 397 will return
18. 65 6MS and 62 4MS respectively The X axis shows the length of the arbitrary modulating waveform The length is in points In our example the first point is O and the last is 9999 total of 10 000 points 6 Now that you have the Y and X parameters set you can generate the shape of the modulating waveform ArbExplorer has a library of standard waveform that include Sine Triangle Square Exponential Pulse and Random Noise waveforms You can use one of these waveforms or import coordinates from an external file to generate more complex waveforms We ll use a 3 37 397 User Manual 3 38 simple sine waveform for this example From the Waves menu select the Sine Leave the parameters in the Sine dialog box as is and press OK 7 The last step is to download the modulating waveform to the 397 Press the download button to send the modulating waveform to the instrument 101 x Start pts 0 End pte 9939 Defaut RDA r Peak Deviation 1 Max 67200000 Cancel Min e0800000 OK r Wave Properties Cycles f Start Phase fo Power fi Figure 3 24 Using ArbExplorer to Generate Arbitrary Modulating Waveforms If you did not make any programming errors the front panel outputs will generate frequency modulated waveforms having carrier frequency of 2MHz deviation frequency of 100kHz and modulating frequency of 100Hz We ll now check the results at the rear panel sine output connector and compare wh
19. An internal timer repeatedly generates a burst from 1 to 1M counted cycles This mode is not available in SEQ mode Front panel BNC TTL Positive or negative programmable 2MHz to DC 100mHz to 2MHz 7 digits 0 196 IEEE 488 2 command 397 User Manual Trigger Start Phase Programmable Units Range Resolution Breakpoint Range Event to cause stop at breakpoint Waveform starts from point n and completes at point n 1 Waveform points 0 to 1 Meg waveform points 4 points Waveform starts after trigger and stops at breakpoint position Each channel can be programmed with its unique breakpoints 0 to 1 Meg waveform points SCPI command or valid stop signal at the TRIG input Event to cause start from breakpoint SCPI command or valid start signal at the TRIG input Breakpoint Error Start Stop Control Description Start Stop control System Delay Trigger to waveform output STANDARD WAVEFORMS A 4 Frequency Range Source Internal synthesizer Resolution Accuracy Stability Sine Frequency Range Band Flatness Programmable Parameters Triangle Frequency Range Adjustable Parameters Square Frequency Range Adjustable Parameters Pulse Ramp Frequency Range Adjustable Parameters Delay Rise Time High Time Fall Time 4 points Valid signal at the Trigger input stops the waveform at a programmed breakpoint The Stop signal operates simultaneously on both channels Channel stop occurs separately and ind
20. C 4rbExplorerk Mot PulsSing1 0 88 1 1 1 D Channel 1 Channel d Download All Waveform Shape segment 1 Save Clear Men Close KL Figure 4 7 The Waveform Studio Y TIP Point and click on one of the segments to show its shape in the Waveform Shape window Description of the various buttons in the Segment Table is given below Append adds segment number at the end of the table Insert adds a segment above a highlighted segment line Delete removes a highlighted segment Channel 1 shows segment table for channel 1 only Channel 2 shows segment table for channel 2 only Save saves current table settings Download Selection downloads a highlighted segment only to the 397 memory Download All downloads the complete table to the 397 memory The Sequence Table Waveform Studio Channel 1 gt x ArbExplorer The Control Panels Clear Mem wipes out the entire memory and clears the table for fresh settings Close removes the Waveform Studio from the screen If you have not saved your work the table setting will be lost As was explained in the above the waveform memory can be divided into smaller segments and up to 2048 segments can be defined and used as individual arbitrary waveforms Having a limited size of waveform memory can for some applications pose a limitation however if sections of the waveform are repet
21. Figure 4 19 The Toolbar Icons Waveforms are created and edited on the waveform screen Figure 4 20 shows an example of a waveform created using the equation editor and the anchors to limit generation of the waveform between points 100 and 900 The various elements of the waveform screen are described below The waveform screen has two axes vertical and horizontal Both axes are divided into points The vertical axis is labeled from 8191 through 8192 for a total of 16 384 point This number represents 14 bits of vertical resolution and cannot be changed because it is critical to the range of which ArbExplorer The Wave Composer the 397 operates The horizontal axis by default has 1000 points from point O to 999 This number can be changed using the Wave Length field in the Toolbar The maximum length depends on the option installed in your instrument The wave composer will let you define the horizontal axis to a maximum of 4M words Figure 4 20 The Waveform Screen Notice on the left top and on the right top there are two triangles pointing to the center of the screen These are the anchors The anchors are used as the start and end pointers where your waveform will be created For example if you want to create a sine waveform between point 100 and point 500 you place the left anchor at point 100 and the right at point 500 and then generate the sine from the built in library There are two ways to control anchor
22. H keys to adjust the readout to the required setting After you modify the reading press Execute to update the 397 with the new setting Di Note Normal color of the digital reading is dark blue If you modify the reading the color changes to a lighter shade of blue indicating that the LW120 has not been updated yet with the new parameter Pressing Execute will update the instrument and will restore the color of the digital readout to dark blue indicating that the displayed value is the same as the generator setting Also note that the digital readout has an autodetect mechanism for the high and low limits You cannot exceed the limits if you are using the dial but only if you use the keypad In case you do the program will not let you download an illegal parameter and you ll be requested to correct your setting ArbExplorer The Control Panels Step Use these keys to select sweep step from two increment options linear or logarithmic Direction Use these keys to program sweep direction Up select sweep from Start to Stop sample clock setting and Down selects sweep from the Stop to Start sample clock setting Refer to Chapter 3 of this manual to learn more about sweep operation Run Mode The Run Mode keys define how the generator sweeps You have a choice of continuous triggered and gated sweep Unlike the main trigger function the run modes for the sweep function operate in continuous mode For example if you place the ins
23. Numeric Parameter range freq 10e3 to 50e6 lt ampl gt 10e 3 to 10 lt offs gt 4 5 to 4 5 delay 0 to 99 9 rise 0 to 99 9 fall 0 to 99 9 APPLy RAMP Response The 397 will return freq ampl offs delay high fall Default values are 1e6 5 0 10 10 10 APPLy SINC freq ampl offs N cycles Purpose This command is a high level command that programs the 397 to output sinc waveform along with its associated parameters freq sets the output frequency in units of hertz lt ampl gt sets the output amplitude in units of volts lt offs gt sets the output offset in units of volts N cycles sets the number of zero crossing Parameter type Numeric Parameter range freq 10e3 to 50e6 lt ampl gt 10e 3 to 10 lt offs gt 4 5 to 4 5 N cycle 4to 100 APPLy SINC Response The 397 will return freq ampl offs N cycle Default values are 1e6 5 0 10 5 18 Remote Programming Reference SOURce Subsystem APPLy EXPonential lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt exp gt Purpose This command is a high level command that programs the 397 to output exponential waveform along with its associated parameters freq sets the output frequency in units of hertz e lt ampl gt sets the output amplitude in units of volts lt offs gt sets the output offset in units of volts e exp sets the exponent value Parameter type Numeric
24. ON and from this moment onwards all outputs will be synchronized If you want to remove slave units from couple mode all you have to do is change the Couple State on the master unit to Inactive OFF After you have synchronized all of your instruments you can further adjust the phase offset between the instruments Select the Start Position field and program the parameter to the required phase offset While modifying the edge offset bear in mind that both channels are shifted simultaneously from the adjacent channel Also note that the offset has 4 points resolution so expect to have increments of sample clock period x 4 Using the Instrument Synchronizing Multiple Instruments Nj Note Due to cable connections and depending on the length of the cables you are using it is possible that you ll notice some phase delays between the master and slave units This is perfectly normal If you are using 1 meter cables you should expect about 2 ns delay between master and slave Additional delays will accumulate as you add slave units You can minimize the delay effect by using shorter cables where practical however it is impossible to eliminate this delay entirely One way to compensate for inter instrument delays is using different cable length at the output connectors You can also use the edge offset parameter to compensate for larger delays 3 3 53 397 User Manual 3 54 Chapter 4 ArbExplorer Title Page What s in Thi
25. TTL level reference signal The external reference input is available for those applications requiring better accuracy and stability reference than the one provided inside the 397 The reference input is active only after selecting the external reference source mode This SMB connector outputs the programmed sample clock frequency Output level is ECL terminated into 500 to 2V Note that correct termination is necessary for this output otherwise you will not see this signal at all This output generates sample clock waveforms continuously regardless if the 397 is operating in continuous trigger or gated modes The sample clock output is used for multiple instruments synchronization In master mode connect this output with an SMB to SNB connector to the adjacent slave instrument You may also use this output to synchronize other components in your system to one master clock This SMB connector accepts ECL level signal terminated into 500 to 2V The external clock input is available for those applications requiring synchronization to one sample clock source Normally this input is disabled When enabled the clock at this input replaces the internal clock generator and the 397 generates waveforms having the external sample clock rate The sample clock output is also used for multiple instruments synchronization In slave mode connect this input with an SMB to SMB connector to the adjacent master instrument This 9 pin D conne
26. The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 10ms would be returned as 10E 3 positive numbers are unsigned Default value is 1e3 5 45 397 User Manual TRIGger IMMediate Purpose This command will stimulate the 397 output once This command will affect the 397 only after it will be set to interrupted operation TRG Purpose This common command has the same affect as the TRIG IMM command 5 46 Remote Programming Reference TRACe Subsystem TRACe The TRACe subsystem contains commands which allow definition Subsystem of segments and their corresponding lengths addition and deletion of segments and the loading of waveform data Sequence commands control segments link and loops DMA command places 397 in a special data transfer mode where the generator s message based interface is bypassed and data is loaded directly from the data bus Optional nodes were omitted from these commands Defaults are shown in bold Keyword Parameter Form Default Low Limit High Limit TRACe f header binary block DEFine segment number length DELete segment number DELete ALL i SELect segment number SEQuence lt header gt lt binary block ADVance AUTOmatic STEP SINGle MIXed AUTOmatic SOURce 7 EXTernal INTernal EXTernal DEFine lt link gt lt seg_ gt lt loop gt lt mode gt DELete ALL Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Arbitrary wav
27. Trigger Source External Connect 397 Channel 1 2 output to the oscilloscope input Place the feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope inputs 3 Configure the function generator as follows Frequency 1kHz Run Mode Continue Waveform TTL Output 4 Connect the function generator TTL output to the 397 TRIG IN connector 5 Connect the function generator main output to the 2 channel of the oscilloscope 6 Configure the 397 channels 1 2 as follows Reset Frequency 10kHz Run Mode Trigger Output On 6 13 397 User Manual Test Procedure 1 Modify phase start from 0 to 256 512 and 768 points 2 Verify on the oscilloscope that the 397 start phase changes from 0 to 90 180 and 270 accordingly Test Results Pass Fail Internal Trigger Equipment Counter Accuracy Preparation 1 Configure the counter as follows Function Freq A Coupling DC 500 2 Connect 397 Channel 1 output to the counter input 3 Using ArbExplorer prepare and download the following waveform Wavelength 16 points Waveform Square wave 4 Configure the 397 channel 1 as follows Reset Waveform Arbitrary Run Mode Trigger Trigger Source internal Internal Trig As required by the test Output On Test Procedure 1 Settrigger as required in Table 6 11 2 Verify trigger reading as shown in Table 6 11 Test Results Pass Fail Table 6 12 Internal Trigger Generator Operation
28. eee 3 16 Gated NIE H 3 17 Burst MO EE 3 18 Using theArm ASAS EE 3 19 Using the Manual Toga Seir ege desees emu acude S He des io 3 20 Using the SYNC Output rr EE rnt beoe Hle dek bea doa b vt gebe eoe det 3 20 Applying at 3 21 Selecting the SCLK Source and Reference eeeseeeeeeenenn teretes 3 21 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms ooiocicnnnnnnoaninnnnincc eniin ne nna nnn nennen 3 22 What Are Arbitrary Waveforms ooooooccccccnnnononononononononononononononononononononnnnonononnnonononnnnos 3 23 Generating Arbitrary Waveiormms 3 24 Generating Sequenced WaveforMS cocococicnnononconacanne rr 3 26 What Are Sequenced Wavetorms nran nran nnna 3 27 Editing the Sequence Table 3 29 Selecting Sequence Advance Modes ccoomooococcccconccoconannnncononcnononnononncccnnrrnnnn corran 3 30 Generating Modulated Waveforms cccccsceccceeeeeeeeeedenecceeece tense seceeeenseeeenenteneeeneeeee 3 32 FM MIO GI AON ER T TEES 3 33 Example 1 Modulating Standard Waveforms Using the Standard FM Mode 3 35 Example 2 Modulating Standard Waveforms Using the Arbitrary FM Mode 3 36 Example 3 Modulating Arbitrary waveforms Using the Arbitrary FM Mode 3 39 gc Wm Mc eck ou is Soe he A eis 3 39 Example 1 FSK Using Standard Waveforms cccccccecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeess 3 41 Example 2 FSK Using Arbitrary Waveioms 3 42 i ll ce
29. programming process and the operation of the generator Using the SEQ DEF command in FIX or USER mode will greatly speed up programming time SEQuence DELete ALL Purpose This command will erase the sequence table 5 56 Remote Programming Reference SYSTem Subsystem for system information Keyword Parameter Form Limit SYSTem ERRor VERSion RESet RST TEST IDN SYSTem ERRor Purpose This query will interrogate the 397 for programming errors Response to query The 397 will return error code Error messages are listed later in this manual SYSTem VERSion Purpose This query will interrogate the 397 for SCPI version Response to query The 397 will return 1999 0 RESet RST Purpose This command will reset the 397 to factory defaults IDN Purpose This query will interrogate the identity of the 397 Response to query The 397 will return Fluke 397 0 1 0 SYSTem Subsystem 5 The system related commands are not related directly to waveform generation but are an important part of operating the 397 These commands can reset or test the instrument or query the instrument Default Low Limit High 5 57 397 User Manual IEEE STD 488 2 Common Commands and Queries 5 58 Since most instruments and devices in an ATE system use similar commands that perform similar functions the IEEE STD 488 2 document has specified a common set of commands and queries that all compatible devic
30. reflective 320 x 240 pixels back lit Green Output on off Separate for each channel Green SYNC on off 85 to 265Vac 48 63 Hz 60W CE marked Mechanical Dimensions Weight Environmental Operating temperature Humidity non condensing Safety Appendices Specifications 212 x 88 x 415 mm W xH x D Approximately 6 Kg 0 C 50 C 11 C 30 C 85 31 C 40 C 75 41 C 50 C 45 EN61010 1 2 revision 397 User Manual A 10
31. the section entitled Unpacking and Initial Inspection The function generator may be operated from a wide range of mains voltage 85 to 265 Vac Voltage selection is automatic and does not require switch setting The instrument operates over the power mains frequency range of 48 to 63Hz Always verify that the operating power mains voltage is the same as that specified on the rear panel The 397 should be operated from a power source with its neutral at or near ground earth potential The instrument is not intended for operation from two phases of a multi phase ac system or across the legs of a single phase three wire ac power system Crest factor ratio of peak voltage to rms should be typically within the range of 1 3 to 1 6 at 1096 of the nominal rms mains voltage To ensure the safety of operating personnel the U S O S H A Occupational Safety and Health requirement and good engineering practice mandate that the instrument panel and enclosure be earth grounded Although BNC housings are isolated from the front panel the metal part is connected to earth ground A WARNING Do not attempt to float the output from ground as it may damage the Model 397 and your equipment Long Term Storage or Repackaging for Shipment Preparation for Use Installation Configuring the Instrument 2 Long Term Storage or Repackaging for Shipment If the instrument is to be stored for a long period of time or shipped to a service center
32. 397 with the new setting Filter The Filter group lets you place filters at the output path There are two sets of filters one for each channel Click on 25MHz 50MHz or All to select both Click on Off to disable all filters Note that the 397 is using the filters for generating the standard sine waveform and therefore if you pres the filter buttons when the 397 is generating sinewave ArbExplorer will prompt with an error message Clock Source The Clock Source group allows selection of the reference for the internal clocks The reference source is important in applications requiring synchronization to larger system clocks The 10MHz is sourcing the entire instrument From this clock the instrument is generating the frequency for the standard waveforms and the sample clock for the arbitrary waveforms The OM sub group provides selection between internal or external reference options Internal is the normal setting for the 397 The internal reference has accuracy and stability of 1ppm An external reference input is provided for applications requiring better 4 27 397 User Manual The Command Editor 4 28 accuracy and stability Click on the Internal button to select the Internal reference or the External button to activate the external reference input A WARNING By selecting an external reference you are disabling the internal reference circuit If you do not have a 10MHz reference connected to the instrument the 397
33. 4 46484V Modify the DMM setting DCV 20V and connect the front panel CHAN 1 connector to the DMM input Use 500 Feedthrough termination at the DMM side of the BNC cable Note and record the offset reading on the DMM Modify 397 channel 1 offset to 4 46483V Adjust RV16 FINE OFFS 1 for offset reading as was recorded in step 3 0 10mV Maintenance and Performance Checks Adjustment Procedures Channel 1 Offset Equipment Adjustment or DMM BNC to BNC cable 500 Feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Procedure 1 Modify 397 channel 1 amplitude setting to 1V and offset to 4V 2 Modify the DMM setting DCV 20V and connect the front panel CHAN 1 connector to the DMM input Use 50Q Feedthrough termination at the DMM side of the BNC cable Adjust RV4 OFFS1 fora DMM reading of 4V 10mV Note and record the value Modify 397 channel 1 offset to 4V Adjust RV1 NULL1 for a DMM reading as was recorder in step 3 except disregard the polarity Repeat steps 3 through 5 until positive and negative readings are within 10mV OEA pO Channel 2 Equipment Amplitude and Balance Adjustment DMM BNC to BNC cable 500 Feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Procedure 1 Modify 397 frequency setting to 1kHz and channel 2 amplitude to 3 161V 2 Modify the DMM setting ACV 20V and connect the front panel CHAN 2 connector to the DMM input Use 50Q Feedthrough termination at the DMM side of the BNC cable
34. 9 Segment 2 Sine Waveform 397 User Manual Dneuu j d4e6szWibodEs 4o C ETE 3 nals L Sactor 0 R Archor 10Z3 4 Figure 1 10 Segment 3 Pulse Waveform The following sequence was made of segment 2 repeated twice segment 1 repeated four times and segment 3 repeated two times Figure 1 11 Sequenced Waveforms Output State The main outputs can be turned on or off The internal circuit is disconnected from the output connector by a mechanical switch relay This feature is useful for connecting the main outputs to an analog bus For safety reasons when power is first applied to the chassis the main output is always off Filters Two filters for each channel are built into the 397 These filters are available for use in various applications such as the creation of high frequency sine waves and removing the staircase effect from waveforms that are generated with high frequency clock rates The filters are also used for reconstructing the standard sine waveform 1 20 Programming The 397 Getting Started 1 Functional Description The 397 has front panel control capability for most of its function parameters and modes However waveform data and sequence tables must be loaded to the 397 from a host computer before it can be output arbitrary or sequenced waveforms There are a number of ways to talk to the instrument They all require that an appropriate software driver be installed in the host computer The re
35. Arbitrary Waveforms d Wave Composer gt C Program Files FlukeVArbExplorer File Edit View Wave Download About SMON TEMSE w alaa Co Jara Ipengpgelvevzzzkdilonpge Anchor Waveform Amplitude Level Adjuster R Anchor 1023 xj Start pts o Max 8131 Cycles C Manual kl j End pts 1023 Min Jess bh 6 Auto Default Equation Amplitude p Remove Store Browse Operands Cancel CILIII 0 255 511 767 1023 Pninte Figure 3 16 The Wave Composer Tool for Generating Arbitrary Waveforms What Are Arbitrary Arbitrary waveforms are generated from digital data points which Waveforms are stored in a working memory The working memory is connected to a digital to analog converter DAC and a sample clock generator is clocking the data points one at a time to the output circuit In slow motion the output generates a waveform that resembles the look of a staircase In reality the DAC is generating amplitude hops that depend on bit arrangement and sample clock speed The working memory has two major properties vertical resolution and memory depth Vertical Resolution This term defines the precision along the vertical axis of which data points can be placed and generated by the DAC The 397 is using 14 bit DAC s to generate arbitrary waveforms Converting 14 bits to precision shows that each data point can be placed along the
36. LeCroy LT342 fitted with jitter package Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 0 1 ms Sampling Rate 50MS s at least Trace A View Jitter Type FREQ CLK Trigger source Channel 2 positive slope Amplitude 1V div 2 Connect 397 Channel 1 outputto the oscilloscope input chan 1 3 Connect the 397 SYNC output to the oscilloscope input chan 2 4 Configure the 397 channels 1 2 as follows 6 19 397 User Manual Reset Modulation Mode Sweep ON Sync On Output On Test Procedure 1 Verify FSK operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Ramp Down Period 1kHz Max A 1MHz Min A 312 5kHz Test Results Pass Fail 2 Move 397 sweep marker position to 42MS s and verify marker position at the middle of the ramp 3 Change oscilloscope time base to jus and verify marker width 2us Test Results Pass Fail 4 Reverse between Start and Stop frequencies and verify oscilloscope reading as before except the ramp is up Test Results Pass Fail 5 Change sweep step to logarithmic and verify oscilloscope exponential up waveform Test Results Pass Fail 6 Remove the cable from 397 channel 1 and connect to chan 2 7 Repeat the test procedure as above for channel 2 Test Results Pass Fail
37. MSBit of the last byte set to 1 The following sequence should be used for downloading arbitrary FM Waveforms 1 Prepare your FM waveform data points using the following relationship N SCLK Hz x 14 31655765 Convert the result from 1 above to 4 byte 32 bit binary word and union with an 8 bit control word Use an I O routine such as ViMoveAsync from the VISA I O library to transfer binary blocks of data to the generator 4 Last data point is sent with MSB bit set to 1 Data transfer is completed and CPU resumes control FM DEViation lt deviation gt Purpose This command will set the deviation frequency in units of samples per second e deviation sets the phase offset between the channels Phase offset is in waveform points Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt deviation gt 1e 3 to 12566 in units of samples per second FM DEViation Response and default The 397 will return the present frequency deviation value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100mHz would be returned as 100E 3 positive numbers are unsigned Default value is 1e3 Default value is 166 FM FUNCtion MODE FIXed USER Purpose This command will set the frequency modulating waveform mode to FlXed standard and USER arbitrary waveforms e FIXed will enable a library of built in standard waveforms 5 22 Remote Programming Reference SOURce Subsystem USER will set the generator to accept arb
38. On Reset Defaults Using the Instrument 3 Overview This chapter contains information about how to operate the Fluke 397 Operation is divided into two general categories basic bench operation and remote operation GPIB USB and ENET Basic bench operation which is covered in this section describes how to use the arbitrary waveform generator using front panel sequences The 397 is supplied with ArbExplorer a PC based software package with a graphical user interface to allow users to program all of the functions directly LabView drivers and a set of SCPI commands are available for more experienced programmers The following paragraphs describe the various modes of operation and give examples of how to program the Model 397 The manual is organized by instrument function and instructions are given in each paragraph on how to use the function from both the front panel and ArbExplorer The 397 has two output channels Although this is a two channel instrument many of the commands that set parameters and functions are common for both channels For example sample clock and run modes can not be set separately for each channel On the other hand you may set each channel to have different function shape amplitude and offset Table 3 1 lists the function and parameters and their related Inter channel dependency During use output connectors must be properly terminated to minimize signal reflection or power loss due to impedance mismat
39. Parameter range freq 10e3 to 50e6 lt ampl gt 10e 3 to 10 lt offs gt 4 5 to 4 5 exp 20 to 20 APPLy EXPonential Response The 397 will return freq lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt exp gt Default values are 1e6 5 0 1 APPLy GAUSsian lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt exp gt Purpose This command is a high level command that programs the 397 to output gaussian waveform along with its associated parameters lt freq gt sets the output frequency in units of hertz lt ampl gt sets the output amplitude in units of volts lt offs gt sets the output offset in units of volts exp sets the exponent value Parameter type Numeric Parameter range freq 10e3 to 50e6 lt ampl gt 10e 3 to 10 lt offs gt 4 5 to 4 5 exp 10 to 200 APPLy GAUSsian Response The 397 will return freq lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt exp gt Default values are 1e6 5 0 20 5 19 397 User Manual APPLy DC lt _ampl gt Purpose This command is a high level command that programs the 397 to output DC level along with its associated parameter lt ampl sets the output level as percentage of the amplitude setting Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt _ampl gt 100 to 100 in units of APPLy DC Response to query version The 397 will return lt _ampl gt Default values are 100 APPLy USER lt seg gt lt sclk gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt Purpose This command is a high leve
40. Point 0 to n Programmable with 4 point resolution Programmable 4 to 100000 waveform points 4 points Channel 1 Sinewave Output Description Connector Impedance Level Protection Source Frequency Range and Resolution Flatness Harmonics and Spurious Total Harmonic Distortion Harmonics and non related spurious to 100 MHz Appendices Specifications An output that is directly derived from the sample clock generator and has an output frequency equal to the programmed sample clock frequency This output generates sine waveforms that corresponds to sample clock setting including modulated waveform such as FM sweep FSK and Ramped FSK Rear panel BNC 500 1 1V into 500 Protected against temporary short to case ground Sample clock frequency Same as Sample clock 3dB at 100MHz 0 05 to 100kHz lt 30dBc to 100MHz Multi Instrument Synchronization Connectors Description Interconnecting Cables SCLK Output Connector Level SCLK Input Connector Input Level Impedance Minimum Pulse Width Master Slave Connector INPUTS TRIG Input Connector Impedance Threshold Level Min Pulse Width Slope These connectors are used for synchronizing one master instrument to multiple slave units thereby creating a multi channel fully synchronized and jitter free system There are three connectors in this group which must be connected between the instruments to achieve synchronization SCLK output SCLK input a
41. a high level command that programs the 397 to output pulse waveform along with its associated parameters freq sets the output frequency in units of hertz lt ampl gt sets the output amplitude in units of volts offs sets the output offset in units of volts delay sets the delay to the pulse rise transition in units of 96 rise sets the pulse rise time in units of 96 high sets the pulse high time in units of 96 fall sets the pulse fall time in units of 96 Parameter type Numeric Parameter range freq 10e3 to 50e6 lt ampl gt 10e 3 to 10 lt offs gt 4 5 to 4 5 delay 0 to 99 9 rise 0 to 99 9 high 0 to 99 9 fall 0 to 99 9 APPLy PULSe Response The 397 will return freq lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt delay gt lt rise gt lt high gt lt fall gt Default values are 1e6 5 0 10 10 10 10 APPLy RAMP lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt delay gt lt rise gt lt fall gt Purpose This command is a high level command that programs the 397 to output ramp waveform along with its associated parameters 5 17 397 User Manual freq sets the output frequency in units of hertz lt ampl gt sets the output amplitude in units of volts lt offs gt sets the output offset in units of volts lt delay gt sets the delay to the pulse rise transition in units of lt rise gt sets the pulse rise time in units of lt fall gt sets the pulse fall time in units of Parameter type
42. advance mode is set to SING To understand better the way the mode switch affects a sequence consider the following sequence setting SEQ DEF 1 1 1 0 Step 1 segment 1 no loops mode 0 SEQ DEF 2 2 1 1 Step 2 segment 2 no loops mode 1 SEQ DEF 3 3 10 1 Step 3 segment 3 10 loops mode 1 SEQ DEF 4 4 1 0 Step 4 segment 4 no loops mode 0 5 55 397 User Manual After selecting the sequence mode the generator will generate segment 1 and automatically advance to segment 2 It will continue to generate segment 2 until a valid trigger is received After it has received a trigger the generator will complete segment 2 and advance to segment 3 It will continue to generate and loop segment 2 until a valid trigger is received After it has received a trigger the generator will complete 10 loops of segment 3 and will advance to segment 4 From segment 4 the generator will automatically advance to the beginning of the sequence and will repeat the above Nj Note Although trigger signals are used to advance mixed mode the mixed mode operates in continuous mode only The mode parameter will be ignored if you will use SING as advance mode for the sequence table Y Tip Every time you use the SEQ DEF command while your 397 is in sequenced operating mode the instrument attempts to rebuild the sequence table and restart the sequence Therefore sending this command in sequenced mode will slow the
43. and utilities This is also a great tool for you to experiment simple or complex command string to gain experience before you write your own code ArbExplorer has a command editor feature that allows direct low level programming of the 397 using SCPI commands just as you will be using them in your program Installation of ArbExplorer is simple and intuitive and only requires that visa32 dll runtime file be added to your Windows system folder Download the file from Nl s National instrument web site www ni com Installation and operating instruction for ArbExplorer are given in Chapter 4 The USB driver is required if you intend to connect the 397 to a host computer on a USB bus Information how to connect the USB cable and how to load the software is given in this chapter In general the 397 can be controlled from remote using one of the following interfaces USB Ethernet and GPIB Remote interface cables are not supplied with the instrument so if you plan on using one of the remote programming option make sure you have a suitable cable to connect to your host computer The following paragraphs describe how to connect and configure the 397 to operate from remote The description is given for computers fitted with Windows XP but little changes will show while installing software on different Windows versions You can connect your Fluke 397 to GPIB USB or LAN adapters depending on your application and requirements from your system I
44. as 1E3 positive numbers are unsigned Default value is 80e3 5 26 Remote Programming Reference SOURce Subsystem FSK MODE HOP RAMPed Purpose This command will select one of the FSK modes e HOP will select non delayed hops from carrier sclk to shifted sclk RAMPed will select ramped shifts from carrier sclk to shifted sclk Parameter type Discrete FSK MODE Response and default The 397 will return HOP or RAMP depending on its present setting Default is HOP FSK RAMP TIME lt time gt Purpose This command will set the time it takes for the sample clock frequency to ramp up and down from carrier to shifted frequencies and back This parameter will effect the 397 only when the instrument is set to operate in ramped FSK mode time will set the ramp up and down time Parameter type Numeric Parameter range time 10e 6 to 1 in units of seconds FSK RAMP TIME Response and default The 397 will return the present ramp time value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 10ms would be returned as 10E 3 positive numbers are unsigned Default value is 1e 3 FUNCTion MODE FIXed USER SEQuence Purpose This command defines the type of waveform that will be available at the output connector lt FlXed gt selects standard waveforms e USER selects arbitrary waveforms e lt SEQuence gt selects sequenced waveforms Parameter type Discrete FUNCTion MODE Response and
45. bits in the event registers To enable bits in an enable register write a decimal value that corresponds to the binary weighted sum of the bits required to enable in the register 5 59 397 User Manual The Status Byte Register STB 5 60 The Status Byte summary register contains conditions from the other registers Query data waiting in the generator s output buffer is immediately reported through the Message Available bit bit 4 Bits in the summary register are not latched Clearing an event register will clear the corresponding bits in the Status Byte summary register Description of the various bits within the Status Byte summary register is given in the following Bit 0 Decimal value 1 Not used always set to O Bit 1 Decimal value 2 Not used always set to O Bit 2 Decimal value 4 Not used always set to O Bit 3 Decimal value 8 Not used always set to O Bit 4 Decimal value 16 Message Available Queue Summary Message MAV The state of this bit indicates whether or not the output queue is empty The MAV summary message is true when the output queue is not empty This message is used to synchronize information exchange with the controller The controller can for example send a query command to the device and then wait for MAV to become true If an application program begins a read operation of the output queue without first checking for MAV all system bus activity is held up until the device responds Bi
46. byte to be sent to the generator is the low byte and then high byte low byte high byte fer os Te oo os Te or oo ove ow T9 owe ow ow oe oe 2 control bits Must be set to 0 initially Figure 5 3 16 bit Waveform Data Point Representation 5 49 397 User Manual As an example Figure 5 4 shows word value of decimal 8025 0x1F59 in a correct format for downloading to the 397 The byte containing 59 is sent first and then the byte containing 1F low byte lt gt high byte CARs EER pee sweep ges ego l 5 l 9 l 1 l F J Control Bits O Figure 5 4 Ox1F59 Data Point Representation TRACe DEFine lt segment_number gt lt length gt Purpose This command will define waveform segments and their relative length Note that if you are using the TRAC DATA header to download waveform data there is no need for this command because the header contains segment size information and therefore the segment will resize automatically The use of this command is absolutely a must if you truncate waveforms and download to the instrument as one waveform e segment number will set the selected segment e lt length gt will assign length to the above selected segment Minimum segment length is 16 points the maximum is limited by the memory size 4M Nj Note The 397 operates in interlaced mode where four memory cells generate one byte of data Therefore segment size can be programmed in numbers ev
47. can be loaded into each segment each having a unique length Minimum segment size is 16 points as long as its playback time is more than 10us Information on how to partition the memory define segment length and download waveform data to the 397 is given in the following paragraphs 5 47 397 User Manual TRACe lt header gt lt binary_block gt Purpose This command will download waveform data to the 397 memory Waveform data is loaded to the 397 using high speed binary transfer A special command is defined by IEEE STD 488 2 for this purpose High speed binary transfer allows any 8 bit bytes including extended ASCII code to be transmitted in a message This command is particularly useful for sending large quantities of data As an example the next command will download to the generator an arbitrary block of data of 1024 points TRACe 42048 lt binary block gt This command causes the transfer of 2048 bytes of data 1024 waveform points into the active memory segment The lt header gt is interpreted this way e The ASCII 23 designates the start of the binary data block e 4 designates the number of digits that follow 2048 is the even number of bytes to follow The generator accepts binary data as 14 bit integers which are sent in two byte words Therefore the total number of bytes is always twice the number of data points in the waveform For example 20000 bytes are required to download a waveform with 10000
48. connection between two networks If your network does not have a gateway set this parameter to 0 0 0 0 2 15 397 User Manual Choosing a Static IP For a Network Administered by a Network Administrator Address f you are adding the Ethernet device to an existing Ethernet network you must choose IP addresses carefully Contact your network administrator to obtain an appropriate static IP address for your Ethernet device Also have the network administrator assign the proper subnet mask and gateway IP For a Network without a Network Administrator If you are assembling your own small Ethernet network you can choose your own IP addresses The format of the IP addresses is determined by the subnet mask You should use the same subnet mask as the computer you are using with your Ethernet device If your subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 the first three numbers in every IP address on the network must be the same If your subnet mask is 255 255 0 0 only the first two numbers in the IP addresses on the network must match For either subnet mask numbers between 1 and 254 are valid choices for the last number of the IP address Numbers between 0 and 255 are valid for the third number of the IP address but this number must be the same as other devices on your network if your subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 Table 2 1 shows examples of valid and invalid IP addresses for a network using subnet mask 255 255 255 0 All valid IP addresses contain the s
49. deviation Note that the forward peak deviation cannot exceed the pre defined Deviation parameter as shown on the Toolbar In case you need to exceed the pre defined peak value you must quit this box and modify the Deviation parameter to provide sufficient range for the forward peak deviation range 4 41 397 User Manual ha FM Wave Composer gt Ex Progra am Files Fluke ArbEsplorerV Mot FmDefwvf Sine Wave Anchor Start pts 200 End es f 499 Figure 4 22 Generating Sine Modulation Using the FM Composer Min Peak Deviation This parameter defines the backwards peak deviation Note that the backwards peak deviation cannot exceed the pre defined Deviation parameter as shown on the Toolbar In case you need to exceed the pre defined peak value you must quit this box and modify the Deviation parameter to provide sufficient range for the backwards peak deviation range Cycles The Cycles parameter defines how many sine cycles will be created within the specified start and end anchor points The example below shows three sine cycles Start Phase The start phase parameter defines the angle of which the sine will start The example shows 0 start phase Power Sine to the power of 1 will generate a perfect sine Power range is from 1 through 9 4 42 Generating ArbExplorerO 4 One of the most powerful feature within ArbExplorer and probably the feature that will be used most is the Equation Editor The Wave
50. example look at the equation that is shown in Figure 4 23 This equation will generate the waveform as shown in Figure 4 20 If you change the Max and Min setting in the Waveform Amplitude fields and press the Adjust key your waveform will offset immediately without changing the equation The same way you can also change amplitude only or both amplitude and offset If you check the Manual option you ll have to click on the Adjust button for the Waveform Amplitude parameters to take effect The Adjust button name will change to Restore and back to Adjust if you click on it again If you check the Auto option your waveform will be created automatically with the new Amplitude setting Equation The Equation group has four buttons and the equation field You will be using the Equation field for writing your equations Equation syntax and conventions are discussed in the following paragraphs The Remove button clears the equation field so you can start typing a new equation Click on the Store button to store your equation if you intend to use it again The Browse button provides access to waveform pre stored files in your computer for combining them in new equations The Operands button expands the bottom of the dialog box to show the operands you can use with your equation While you type and store equations they are collected in a history file and can be used again by expanding the history log from the equation field Control Buttons The
51. few waveforms to one The partition table then divides the memory to the individual and original size of ArbExplorer The Control Panels each waveform If you download waveforms using the waveform studio they already contain segment size and there is no need for further use of the memory partition table Using the Waveform The Waveform Studio as shown in Figure 4 7 has two parts 1 Studio Segment Table and 2 Sequence Table The purpose of the waveform studio is to provide access to waveform files that are already resident in the system These files can be delegated to various segments and later be used as individual waveforms or combined into complex sequences The Segment Table Using the Segment Table you may list and download waveform files that were previously stored on the computer The table shows the segment number and its associated file name length and its download status There are other means to download waveforms to memory segments such as the Wave Composer and individual function calls The waveform studio makes it easier by combining multiple and complex commands into one simple dialog box To access the Segment table click anywhere on the Segment Table area If it was not yet it will turn white as opposed to the Sequence Table area that turns gray The Segment Table area is divided into three parts the table area the waveform shape area and control buttons When you point and click on one of the waveforms its shap
52. for a minimum time to avoid damage to the components or printed conductors 3 Todesolder components use a commercial solder sucker or a solder removing SOLDER WICK size 3 4 Always replace a component with an exact duplicate as specified in the parts list The following performance checks verify proper operation of the Performance instrument and should normally be used Checks 1 As a part of the incoming inspection of the instrument specifications 2 As part of the troubleshooting procedure 3 Afterany repair or adjustment before returning the instrument to regular service Tests should be performed under laboratory conditions having an Environmental ambient temperature of 25 C 5 C and at relative humidity of less Conditions than 80 If the instrument has been subjected to conditions outside these ranges allow at least one additional hour for the instrument to stabilize before beginning the adjustment procedure Warm up Period Most equipment is subject to a small amount of drift when it is first turned on To ensure accuracy turn on the power to the Model 397 and allow it to warm up for at least 30 minutes before beginning the performance test procedure 6 5 397 User Manual Initial Instrument Setting Recommended Test Equipment To avoid confusion as to which initial setting is to be used for each test itis required that the instrument be reset to factory default values prior to each te
53. install software for FLUKE 397 USB Arbitrary Waveform Generator If your hardware came with an installation CD QE or floppy disk insert it now What do you want the wizard to do O Install the software automatically Recommended Figure 2 4 Found New Hardware Wizard Immediately thereafter the Found New Hardware Wizard will open as shown in Figure 2 4 Select the Install from a list or specific Location option and click on next At this time insert the installation CD into your CD driver If you know the logical letter for your CD drive type in the information in the path field If you are not sure where this driver is click on the Browse button and look for the path Check the appropriate controls as shown in Figure 2 5 and then click on Next To complete the process press on Finish as shown in Figure 2 6 2 10 Configuring the Instrument y Selecting a Remote interface Found New Hardware Wizard Please choose your search and installation options E Y Search for the best driver in these locations Use the check boxes below to limit or expand the default search which includes local paths and removable media The best driver found will be installed C Search removable media floppy CD ROM Include this location in the search D Drivers Browse Don t search will choose the driver to install Choose this option to select the device driver from a list Windows does not guarantee that t
54. integer number before it is applied to the channel 2 circuits The sample clock rate is programmed in units of S s samples per second and will affect the instrument only when it is programmed to output arbitrary or sequenced waveforms The SCLK parameter has no effect on standard waveforms To access the required parameter click on the button until the LED next to the required parameter turns on The value that is associated with the lit LED is displayed on the digital display You can use the dial keyboard or the 1 H keys to adjust the readout to the required setting After you modify the reading press Execute to update the 397 with the new reading The Sequence Advance group provides control over advance modes for the sequence generator Advance options are Auto Stepped Single and Mixed Refer to the 397 manual to find out more when and how to use these advance modes You should be careful while selecting modes because it is possible to cause ArbExplorer The Control Panels settings conflict for example if you select the Single option before you modified the run mode to Triggered The Advance Source programs from where the sequence will receive its advance stimuli If you select the Ext option you must apply a trigger source to the trigger input On the other hand selecting Int will facilitate the internal trigger generator source Memory Management The memory management group provides access to the memory partition
55. invoice Buyer for importation costs of repair replacement parts when product purchased in one country is submitted for repair in another country Fluke s warranty obligation is limited at Fluke s option to refund of the purchase price free of charge repair or replacement of a defective product which is returned to a Fluke authorized service center within the warranty period To obtain warranty service contact your nearest Fluke authorized service center to obtain return authorization information then send the product to that service center with a description of the difficulty postage and insurance prepaid FOB Destination Fluke assumes no risk for damage in transit Following warranty repair the product will be returned to Buyer transportation prepaid FOB Destination If Fluke determines that failure was caused by neglect misuse contamination alteration accident or abnormal condition of operation or handling including overvoltage failures caused by use outside the product s specified rating or normal wear and tear of mechanical components Fluke will provide an estimate of repair costs and obtain authorization before commencing the work Following repair the product will be returned to the Buyer transportation prepaid and the Buyer will be billed for the repair and return transportation charges FOB Shipping Point THIS WARRANTY IS BUYER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCL
56. is required that the instrument be reset to factory default values prior to each adjustment Use the following procedures to calibrate the Model 397 The following paragraphs show how to set up the instrument for calibration and what the acceptable calibration limits are Equipment Oscilloscope 500Q probe Procedure 1 Modify 397 frequency setting to 1 5625MHz 2 Connect a 5000 probe to U50 pin 17 and adjust RV13 DUTY CYCLE for a approximately 5096 duty cycle waveform 3 Connect the probe to U50 pin 20 and re adjust RV13 for approximately 5096 duty cycle waveform 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you achieve the smallest error at these two points Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable Dual banana to BNC adapter Procedure 1 Modify 397 frequency setting to 1kHz 2 Modify the DMM setting to DCV 2V measurements and connect the rear panel SINE OUT connector to the DMM input 3 Adjust RV12 SINE OFFS for OV 5 mV reading Equipment Counter 10MHz External Reference BNC to BNC cable Procedure 1 Modify 397 frequency setting to 10 00000MHz amplitude to 2V and output function to square waveform 2 Modify the counter setting to frequency measurements and connect the front panel CHAN 1 connector to the counter input Use external frequency reference to drive the counter clock 3 Adjust RV7 10MHz ADJ for 10 000000 1Hz reading 6 25 397 User Manual Channel 1 Amplitude and Balance Adjustment Channel 1 Offset Fi
57. it was last saved the Wave Composer will prompt you to Save or Abandon changes these changes 4 31 397 User Manual 4 32 Edit Commands The Edit commands are used for manipulating the waveform that is drawn on the screen The editing commands are explained in the following paragraphs Autoline The Autoline command lets you draw straight line segments To draw a line the left mouse button at the start point Click again at the next point and then click on the right mouse button to terminate this operation Sketch The Sketch command lets you draw free hand segments To draw a line using this command click and hold the left mouse button at the start point Release the mouse button when you want to stop and then click on the right mouse button to terminate this operation Smooth The Smooth command lets you smooth out rough transitions on your waveform This is done mathematically by multiplying waveform coordinates by the non linear portion of a cubic parabola The Smooth operation is done on segments of the waveform that are bound by anchors Anchor operation is described later in this chapter Place the anchors on the left and right of your waveform segment and select the Smooth command The waveform wvill change its shape immediately to follow the mathematical pattern of a parabolic curve Note that small segments with fast transitions when combined with parabolic expressions have tendencies to generate even larger transit
58. lift the top cover from its back end and slide the cover to the rear to clear the front panel spring latch Do the same for the bottom After removing the covers from the instrument access the component side for calibration and checks and the solder side when replacing components 3 When replacing the top and bottom covers reverse the above procedure 6 3 397 User Manual Special Handling of Static Sensitive Devices Cleaning 6 4 CMOS devices are designed to operate at very high impedance levels for low power consumption As a result any normal static charge that builds up on your person or clothing may be sufficient to destroy these devices if they are not handled properly When handling such devices use the precautions described below to avoid damaging them 1 CMOS IC s should be transported and handled only in containers specially designed to prevent static build up Typically these parts are received in static protected containers of plastic or foam Keep these devices in their original containers until ready for installation 2 Ground yourself with a suitable wrist strap Remove the devices from the protective containers only at a properly grounded workstation 3 Remove a device by grasping the body do not touch the pins 4 Any printed circuit board into which the device is to be inserted must also be grounded to the bench or table 5 Use only anti static type solder suckers 6 Use only grounded sol
59. pattern The resolution and accuracy of the modulated waveform is unsurpassed and can only be duplicated by mathematical simulation The FM composer is loaded with many features and options so use the following paragraphs to learn how to create and download modulating waveforms to the 397 using the FM Composer Invoke the FM Composer from Panels bar The Wave Composer has three sections Commands bar Toolbar and Waveform screen Refer to Figure 4 21 throughout the description of these parts The commands bar is exact duplication of the commands bar in the Wave Composer lt provides access to standard Windows commands such as File and View In general clicking on one of the commands opens a dialog box with an additional list of commands Then clicking on an additional command may open a dialog box or generate an immediate action For example Clicking on File and then Exit will cause an immediate termination of the FM Composer On the other hand clicking on Wave and then on Square will open a Square Wave dialog box that lets you program and edit square wave parameters The various commands in the Commands bar are listed and described below ArbExplorerO 4 Figure 4 21 The FM Composer opening Screen 4 39 397 User Manual 4 40 File Commands The File command has 4 command lines that control waveform files Also use this command to exit the FM composer program Description of the various commands under File i
60. placements 1 Click and hold your mouse cursor on the left anchor triangle and then drag the curtain to the left position Do the same for the right anchor Notice the X and Y coordinates at the top of the waveform screen and how they change to correspond to your anchor placement 4 37 397 User Manual The FM Composer The Commands bar 4 38 2 You can also place your anchors in a more precise manner from the waveform library by programming the start and end points for the waveform An example of anchor placement using the sine dialog box is shown in Figure 4 18 Finally when you are done creating and editing your waveform you can save your work to a directory of your choice The name at the title will show you the name you selected for storing your waveform and its path The FM Composer looks and feels almost like the waveform composer except there is a major difference in what it does If you look at the opening screen as shown in Figure 4 21 you ll see that the vertical axis is marked with frequencies You ll see later that as you draw waveforms on the FM composer screen these waveforms represent frequency changes and not amplitude changes as are generated by the waveform composer The FM composer is a great tool for controlling frequency agility by generating the agility curve as an arbitrary waveform For example if you create a sine waveform the 397 will generate frequency modulated signal that will follow the sine
61. points The IEEE STD 488 2 definition of Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data format is demonstrated in Figure 5 1 B non zero ASCII digit low byte binary high byte o binary Start of Data Block Number of to Follow 2 Byts Per Byte Count Data Point 2 x Number of ASCII digit Figure 5 1 Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data Format Transfer of definite length arbitrary block data must terminate with the EOI bit set This way carriage return CR OdH and line feed LF OaH characters can be used as waveform data points and will not cause unexpected termination of the arbitrary block data binary block Represents waveform data The waveform data is made of 16 bit words however the GPIB link has 8 data bas lines and accepts 8 bit words only Therefore the data has to be prepared as 16 bit words and rearranged as two 8 bit words before it can be used by the 397 as waveform data points The following description shows you how to prepare the data for downloading to the 397 There are a number of points you should be aware of before you start preparing the data 5 48 Remote Programming Reference TRACe Subsystem 1 Each channel has its own waveform memory Therefore make sure you selected the correct active channel before you download data to the generator Waveform data points have 14 bit values Data point range is O to 16 383 decimal Data point 0 to data point 16 383 corresponds
62. proceed as directed below If repacking procedures are not clear to you or if you have questions contact your nearest Tabor Electronics Representative or the Tabor Electronics Customer Service Department 1 Repack the instrument using the wrappings packing material and accessories originally shipped with the unit If the original container is not available purchase replacement materials 2 Be sure the carton is well sealed with strong tape or metal straps 3 Mark the carton with the model and serial number If it is to be shipped show sending and return address on two sides of the box Nj NOTE If the instrument is to be shipped to Tabor Electronics for calibration or repair attach a tag to the instrument identifying the owner Note the problem symptoms and service or repair desired Record the model and serial number of the instrument Show the RMA Returned Materials Authorization order as well as the date and method of shipment ALWAYS OBTAIN AN RMA NUMBER FROM THE FACTORY BEFORE SHIPPING THE 397 TO TABOR ELECTRONICS Preparation for use includes removing the instrument from the container box installing the software and connecting the cables to its input and output connectors If this instrument is intended to be installed in a rack it must be installed in a way that clears air passage to its cooling fans For inspection and normal bench operation place the instrument on the bench in such a way that will clear any o
63. range automatically Therefore traditional line voltage selector is not available on the rear panel To avoid potentially hazardous situations always connect the center pin to mains ground using the line cord that is supplied with the instrument The AC fuse protects the 397 from excessive current Always replace the fuse with the exact type and rating as printed on the rear panel If the fuse blows again after replacement we recommend that you refer your instrument immediately to the nearest LeCroy service center The 397 can be programmed to operate in one of four run modes continuous triggered gated and counted burst These modes are described below As was discussed above both channels share common run mode and if placed in trigger mode will simultaneously start generating waveforms when a valid trigger signal is received at the trigger input If you are using the one of the standard function both waveforms will start and complete at exactly the same instance In arbitrary mode you may select different wavelength for each channel In this case if you have different waveform length the trigger will initiate one output cycle and the outputs will generate one complete waveform The 397 will idle when the longest waveform has completed 397 User Manual Continuous Mode Triggered Mode Gated Mode Burst Mode Frequency Agility In normal continuous mode the selected waveform is generated continuously at the selecte
64. reading the color changes to a lighter shade of blue indicating that the 397 has not been updated yet with the new parameter Pressing Execute will update the instrument and will restore the color of the digital readout to dark blue indicating that the displayed value is the same as the generator setting Also note that the digital readout has an autodetect mechanism for the high and low limits You cannot exceed the limits if you are using the dial but only if you use the keypad In case you do the program will not let you download an illegal parameter and you ll be requested to correct your setting The Arbitrary amp Sequence panel as shown in Figure 4 5 is invoked by pressing the ARB button on the Panels bar Note that if you invoke the Arbitrary amp Sequence Panel from the Panels menu the 397 will not change its output type On the other hand if you select the arbitrary or the sequenced options from the Main Panel the 397 will immediately change its output to the selected waveform type The functional groups in the Arbitrary Waveforms Panel are described below The Parameters group contains two parameters for each channel Amplitude and Offset Actually the values exhibited in this group are exactly the same as in the Main Panel so every time you change amplitude and offset in the Parameters group the other panels are updated automatically To access the required parameter click on the parameter name The LED next to th
65. required field Focus is on a filed that is painted orange 6 To edit the field press Enter The edited field will turn white with orange borders 7 Use the dial or arrow keys to change the field 8 Press Enter again to lock in the setting There are four main types of waveforms that the 397 can produce Standard Arbitrary Sequenced and Modulated waveforms Standard and modulated waveforms are computed from equations and tables that are built into the program The instrument can output arbitrary and sequenced waveforms only after waveform data has been downloaded into its memory Refer to Figure 3 4 and use the following procedure to select an output type Note that there are sub menus associated with each output type menu Accessing and using these sub menus is described later in this chapter The numbers on Figure 3 4 correspond to the procedure steps in the following description B 397 WAVEFORM GENERATOR ont oe foureur sync ODO OOO OOO e coa Bes MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG ARP E SYN RM COFF TYPE BIT BREAKPOINT 1 pi 9 ju 9 an POSITION 6 SLOPE POSITIUE e SYNOJ n Y uo i 4 AN E P A A son TTL son Figure 3 4 Selecting an Output Waveform Type 3 9 397 User Manual Changing the Output Frequency 3 10 Alternately the outputs can be turned on and off from the Outputs sub menu Use the following procedure to open the Outputs dialog box press to toggle output state 1 Press TOP
66. select Offset from the soft key menus to access the offset parameter Nj Note If you use the dial or arrow keys to modify the amplitude or offset parameters the output is updated immediately as soon as you modify the parameter The final value will be locked in as soon as you press Enter If you choose to leave the old value press Cancel to terminate the process and to discard of any change made to this parameter Using the Instrument 3 Selecting a Run Mode MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG TRIGGERED EXT TYPE BIT 13 START Pt 0 POSITION SLOPE POSITIUE Figure 3 8 Programming Amplitude and Offset Selecting a Run The Model 397 offers four run modes Continuous Triggered Mode MENU Gated and Burst The selected waveform is repeated continuously when the instrument is set to operate in Continuous mode In this mode the 397 does not require a trigger source to stimulate output cycles The operating mode defaults to continuous after reset Triggered Gated and Burst modes require an external signal to initiate output cycles In some case an internal trigger generator is available to generate the required trigger stimuli without the need to connect to external devices Figure 3 9 show the run mode options Press one of the soft keys in the left to select the required run mode Description of the various run modes and the parameters that are associated with each run mode is given in the following paragraphs 397
67. sequenced waveform The final period of the complete sequence can be extracted from the following relationship Sequence Duration 1 SCLK n n the number of waveform points in the sequence including looped waveforms Amplitude Defines the amplitude of the sequenced waveform Offset Defines the offset of the sequenced waveform Active segment Programs the active segment in a sequence The SYNC will start at the active segment There is no other purpose for this parameter in the sequence Y Tip Use the arrow keys or the dial to scroll through the sequence parameters The View Table will remain at the top while the others may be accessed selectively Editing the If you select the View option as was described above the sequence table will display as shown in Figure 3 20 If you already have a Sequence Table sequence table in place you can edit the steps and modify the table per your new requirements If you do not have a sequence table you can construct the table from this screen however you must make sure first that the segments you intend to use are loaded with waveforms Observe Figure 3 20 and note the commands that are available for editing and creating a sequence table Apply Changes After you make modifications to the sequence table you must use this command to update the internal registers with the new table settings and output updated immediately with the new settings Changes if made in the ta
68. some initialization buttons that reset internal buffers Description of the various controls on the Utility panel is given below 4 25 397 User Manual Offset pts Muti Instrument Control Figure 4 12 The Utility Panel Multi Instrument Control The Multi Instrument Control group has three buttons Set Configuration Activate and Deactivate The Activate and Deactivate toggle the synchronization function on and off and are done from the master instrument only The configuration of the master and slave units is done from the Set Configuration dialog box that is invoked after you press the Set Configuration button To configure master slave operation press the Set Configuration button The dialog box as shown in Figure 4 13 will display Multi Instrument Synchronization Panel Available Instruments Group to Synchronize Apply Activate Dectivate Master Close Choose Instruments from non Synchro list and Add to Group to Synchronize in the connection order Figure 4 13 The Multi Instruments Synchronization Dialog Box 4 26 ArbExplorer The Control Panels All instruments that were detected on the interface bus when ArbExplorer was launched will be displayed in the Available Instruments list Before you synchronize instruments you must connect the synchronization cable between the master and the slave units The hardware connection is shown in Chapter 3 The list of Group to Synchronize instruments must b
69. that is directly connected to earth via the chassis power supply cable A WARNING Do not remove instrument covers when operating or when the power cord is connected to the mains Any adjustment maintenance and repair of an opened powered on instrument should be avoided as much as possible but when necessary should be carried out only by a skilled person who is aware of the hazard involved The instrument is supplied with a CD that includes the User Manual ArbExplorer and IVI engine and driver Power cord and synchronization cable are also supplied as standard USB and Ethernet cables are available upon request Instrument specifications are listed in Appendix A These specifications are the performance standards or limits against which the instrument is tested Specifications apply under the following conditions output terminated into 50Q after 30 minutes of warm up time and within a temperature range of 20 C to 30 C Specifications outside this range are degraded by 0 1 per C A detailed functional description is given in the following paragraphs The description is divided into logical groups front and rear panel connectors operating modes output type output state filters synchronization and front panel indicators 1 9 397 User Manual The 397 has 3 BNC connectors on its front panel one main output Front Panel for each channel and one SYNC output These connectors are Connectors described below Channel 1
70. the range the dial will have no further effect on the display If you do not want to use the dial you can still change the display reading by using the f or 4 keys or simply type the required number using the standard keyboard features Nj NOTE After you change the displayed readout the 397 will be updated with the new parameter only after you press the Execute button Digital Display The display is used for displaying and reading various 397 parameters just as you would use it on your instrument 4 7 397 User Manual The Main Panel The Main Panel as shown in Figure 4 3 is the first panel you see after invoking ArbExplorer Notice how buttons and LED s are grouped this is done specifically so that common parameters are placed in functional groups The Main Panel groups allow from left to right adjustment of amplitude and offset selection of waveform mode selection of run mode and control over SYNC and Main output parameters Controls where applicable are provided for each channel separately Amplitude V Parameters Figure 4 3 The Main Panel If you are connected properly to a PC and ArbExplorer has detected your instrument then every time you press a button you are getting an immediate action on the 397 It is different if you are changing parameters on the display Doing this you ll have to press the Execute button for the command to update the instrument The functional groups in the Main Pa
71. to full scale amplitude setting For example if your amplitude setting is 5Vpk pk your generator will output waveforms from 2 5V to 2 5V The corresponding level in waveform points is decimal 0 0x0000 for 2 5V and decimal 16 393 Ox3FFF for 2 5V Similarly the OV point will correspond to decimal 8191 0x1FFF 5 The two most significant bits D14 and D15 are control bits and are not available for normal programming They must be set to 0 at all times except during DMA download where the last word is sent with D15 set to 1 Information on this special mode is given later in this chapter PON Figure 5 2 shows how to initially prepare the 16 bit word for a waveform data point Note that there are 14 bits used for data representation The other two bits are used for control purpose and must be set to 0 Also note that the 397 can not accept formats as shown in Figure 5 2 Data has to be further manipulated to a final format that the instrument can accept and process as waveform point MSB high byte gt low byte LSB iss Tos Toss Jove ow Te Tos oe or es To ox os ez To oo 14 bit binary value 0 to 16383 decimal 2 control bits Must be set to O initially Figure 5 2 16 bit Initial Waveform Data Point Representation Figure 5 3 shows the same 16 bit word as in Figure 5 2 except the high and low bytes are swapped This is the correct format that the 397 expects as waveform point data The first
72. to individual segments Using this command segment table data is loaded to the 397 using high speed binary transfer in a similar way to downloading waveform data with the trace command High speed binary transfer allows any 8 bit bytes including extended ASCII code to be transmitted in a message This command is particularly useful for large number of segment As an example the next command will generate two segments with 12 bytes of data that contains start address and segment size information SEGment 212 lt binary block This command causes the transfer of 12 bytes of data 2 segments into the segment table buffer The header is interpreted this way e The ASCII 23 designates the start of the binary data block e 2 designates the number of digits that follow e 12 is the number of bytes to follow This number must divide by 6 The generator accepts binary data as 64 bit integers which are sent as long Therefore the total number of bytes is always eight times the number of segments For example 48 bytes are required to download 6 segments to the segment table The IEEE STD 488 2 definition of Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data format is demonstrated in Figure 5 1 The transfer of definite length arbitrary block data must terminate with the EOI bit set This way carriage return CR OdH and line feed LF OaH characters can be used as segment table data points and will not cause unexpected termination of th
73. value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100mV would be returned as 100E 3 positive numbers are unsigned Default value is 5 VOLTage OFFSet lt offs gt Purpose This command programs the amplitude offset of the output waveform The offset is calibrated when the source impedance is 50Q lt offs gt sets the amplitude offset Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt offs gt 4 5 to 4 5 in units of volts 5 31 397 User Manual VOLTage OFFSet Response and default The 397 will return the present offset value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100mV would be returned as 100E 3 positive numbers are unsigned Default value is 0 SINusoid PHASe lt phase gt Purpose This command programs start phase of the standard sine waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms lt phase gt sets the start phase Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt phase gt 0 to 360 in units of degrees SINusoid PHASe Response and default The 397 will return the present start phase value Default is 0 TRlangle PHASe lt phase gt Purpose This command programs start phase of the standard triangular waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms lt phase gt sets the start phase Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt phase gt 0 to 360 in units of degrees TRlangle PHASe Response and default The 397 will retu
74. vertical axis with a precision of 1 16 384 3 23 397 User Manual Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 3 24 Memory Depth Defines how many data points can be stored for a single waveform cycle The 397 has 4M waveform memory capacity Having such large memory capacity is an advantage Modern applications in the telecommunications industry require simulation of long waveforms without repeatable segments The only way to create such waveforms is having sufficient memory depth On the other hand if you do not need to use very long waveforms but must have many other waveforms stored in your working memory the 397 lets you divide the memory bank to smaller segments and load different waveforms into each segment Downloading waveforms to the 397 and managing arbitrary memory are explained in the programming section of this manual This section assumes that you have already downloaded waveforms and want the instrument to output these waveforms Refer to Figure 3 17 and use the following description to learn how to output arbitrary waveforms and how to program arbitrary waveform parameters To select Arbitrary waveforms as the output waveform type press Waveforms then Arbitrary The screen as shown in Figure 3 17 will display and the output will already generate arbitrary waveforms Note the channel you are currently program and make sure the icon at the upper right corner agrees with your required programming sequence Use the following p
75. waveforms standard Fixed arbitrary User and sequenced waveforms Different waveform types may be assigned to each channel however the both channels must share the same output type Description of the various output types that the instrument can generate is given below The 397 must pre load its memory before it can generate waveforms On power up the waveform memory has no specific data The sine waveform being the default waveform on power on is computed and loaded to the waveform memory as part of the reset procedure If another waveform is required it is being computed and loaded to the waveform memory Waveforms are written from the same start address in the working memory and therefore every time that a new waveform is selected there is some minimal time for the processor to compute and download the data to the memory The 397 can be programmed to output one of nine standard waveform shapes sine triangle square pulse ramp sine x x pulse gaussian pulse rising decaying exponential pulse noise and dc There are some parameters associated with each waveform which modify the shape of the waveform to better suit your needs For example different start phase for the sine waveform can be programmed for each channel to create phase offsets between the two output channels The 397 working memory is capable of storing one or more user defined waveforms The 397 is supplied with 4 Meg memory banks for each channel that can be a
76. 13 BRERKPOINT H SLOPE POSITIVE Za amp JA O4 2 Figure 3 6 Modifying Sample Clock Frequency Dividing the Sample Clock for Channel 2 3 12 1 Press the Frequency soft key to select the Sample Clock parameter 2 Use the numeric keypad to dial the new sample clock frequency value 3 Press M for MHz k for kHz x1 for Hz or m for mHz to terminate the modification process Alternately you can modify the sample clock frequency value with the dial and arrow keys but then the termination of the process is by pressing Enter only Nj Note If you use the dial or arrow keys to modify the sample clock frequency parameter the output is updated immediately as soon as you modify the parameter The final value will be locked in as soon as you press Enter If you choose to leave the old value press Cancel to terminate the process and to discard of any change made to this parameter The sample clock divider is used to divide the sample clock for channel 2 This way each channel can have a different sample clock rate The sample clock is divided using integer numbers only Observe Figure 3 7 and modify frequency and sample clock using the following procedure The index numbers in Figure 3 7 correspond to the procedure steps in the following description e bonos Using the Instrument Programming the Amplitude and Offset FLUKE 397 WAVEFORM GENERATOR MENU e BASE MODE SYNC QU ARM LOFF TYPES BIT BREAKPOI
77. 2 shows an example of this display Dette Del EE Lehr e be ete A e A IP address hostname Ethemetaddress Serial number Model Properties a 00 C0 17 41 00 0 000 397 b 1 Firmware Up Use wait message Refresh il Close Figure 6 2 The NETConfig Utility ei NOTES Click Refresh if you do not see your device in the list of Ethernet devices or to discover a device that your NETConfig utility recently added to the subnet You can only update instruments that appear in the NETConfig window Point and click on the device you want to update The selected device will now have blue background Click on the Firmware Up button The firmware Update dialog box as shown in Figure 6 3 appears Maintenance and Performance Checks 397 TE NETConfig Firmware Update Fi are Update 00 C0 17 41 00 01 Flash binary image filename File transfer progress Current status Update Figure 6 3 The Firmware Update Dialog Box Updating 397 Firmware 6 In the TE NETConfig Firmware Update dialog box click on the E button to browse and locate the upgrade file After you select the file its complete path will be displayed in the Flash binary image filename field as shown in Figure 6 4 Make sure the file in the path agrees with that specified by your supervisor To complete the update process click on Update and observe the File Transfer Progress bar
78. 5 6MS s 4 Press TOP soft key and press the following soft keys sequence Waveforms gt gt Modulated gt gt Modulation Type Sweep 5 Select and press the Sweep Time soft key and program the sweep time parameter to 10ns Press Enter to lock in the new parameter value 6 Select and press the Stop Sample CIk soft key and program the stop sample clock parameter to 25 6MS s Press Enter to lock in the new parameter value Press Enter to lock in the new parameter value If you did not make any programming errors the front panel outputs will generate linearly swept waveforms from 25kHz to 100Hz in 10ms We ll now check the results at the rear panel sine output connector and compare what we get there to what we see on the front panel Remove the cable from the main output connector and connect to the rear panel SINE OUT connector Here is what you should expect to see when you check this output Carrier waveform is sine wave having fixed amplitude level of 1V into 500 The waveform is swept from 25 6 MHz to 102 4kHz in 10ms Sweep step is linear Using the Instrument Generating Modulated Waveforms Example 2 Generating This example will show how to generate sweep modulation using Sweep Using Arbitrary the arbitrary waveforms The start frequency will be set to 100Hz Waveforms and the stop frequency to 25kHz We ll be using linear sweep in the up direction in 10ms We ll monitor the sweep modulation from the front panel outputs then compar
79. 7 FINE OFFS2 for offset reading as was recorded in step 3 0 10mV Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 500 Feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Procedure 1 2 9 tu M Modify 397 channel 2 amplitude setting to 1V and offset to 4V Modify the DMM setting DCV 20V and connect the front panel CHAN 2 connector to the DMM input Use 500 Feedthrough termination at the DMM side of the BNC cable Adjust RV11 OFFS2 for a DMM reading of 4V 10mV Note and record the value Modify 397 channel 1 offset to 4V Adjust RV10 NULL2 for a DMM reading as was recorder in step 3 except disregard the polarity Repeat steps 3 through 5 until positive and negative readings are within 10mV Maintenance and Performance Checks Updating 397 Firmware Updating 397 Firmware A SSES Only qualified persons may perform Firmware updates DO NOT even attempt to perform this operation unless you were trained and certified by Fluke as you may inflict damage on the instrument Always verify with the factory that you have the latest firmware file before you start with your update Before you update the firmware of your 397 check the revision level which is installed in your instrument Each firmware update was done for a reason and therefore if you want to update the firmware for a problem in your system check the readme file that is associated with the update to see if an update will solve your problem The revision level of your firmwa
80. 9 Front Panel Connectors occccccccccccnncnnncnonnnnnnnonnnnnnnnonnnonononnnonnnonnnnnnnnnnnn non nnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnannnas 1 10 Channel LEE E CE 1 10 Ghannel 2 Output ttt e ES eege oat a bet a o aeo ies 1 10 SY ING el TEE 1 10 Front Panel Indicators cuco ee Ft tb n ER PERLE RR PER ORE S EO RUP HERR RT dne 1 10 Front Panel Controls Ee tn tret eia ERRANT ERIS TEE ieee eda 1 10 Rear Panel Connectors tette Aree o ETE ade 1 12 M E E 1 13 RBS E DEEN 1 13 SINE DUNA EN 1 14 REFINAR 1 14 EE eet ee eege 1 14 SCEK Ni t REA RA ERE A o M n a T a t tee 1 14 Ont TEE 1 14 BPN DE 1 15 USB AE E RE 1 15 E d EE 1 15 AG LINE MET 1 15 ee RE 1 15 RUMOR ds ix Ai 1 15 1 1 397 User Manual Continuous Modes oie tied eh eae cte Eege 1 16 Triggered Mode m 1 16 EE 1 16 ET zt ters ettet tutte te ht gru date ter barato ret tfe rade 1 16 Frequency All 000 rh eo rod A pan o oleae sur tb 1 16 O EE 1 17 gelten UR oie 1 17 Ramped ESIS oreet e dette re i A ees 1 17 mum 1 17 Quiput LyDe EE eh ree o T Pr E As Eee one ne Deae et eser teen e reden 1 18 Standard Re E e un ooo dada 1 18 Arbitrary User Waveforms eie di 1 18 Sequenced WaveformS ssssrsrtrrrtrrttrtttrtttrttttt rrtt tEEAEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE EEE EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE 1 18 OUIPUL TEE 1 20 UE 1 20 Programming dE 1 21 1 2 What s in This Chapter Introduction 397 Feature Highlights G
81. 97 to output triangular waveform along with its associated parameters e freq sets the output frequency in units of hertz lt ampl gt sets the output amplitude in units of volts lt offs gt sets the output offset in units of volts phase sets the output start phase in units of degrees Parameter type Numeric Parameter range freq 10e3 to 50e6 lt ampl gt 10e 3 to 10 lt offs gt 4 5 to 4 5 phase 0 to 360 APPLy TRlangle Response The 397 will return freq lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt phase gt Default values are 1e6 5 0 0 APPLy SQUare freq ampl offs duty cycle Purpose This command is a high level command that programs the 397 to output square waveform along with its associated parameters freq sets the output frequency in units of hertz lt ampl gt sets the output amplitude in units of volts lt offs gt sets the output offset in units of volts duty cycle sets the squarewave duty cycle in units of 96 5 16 Remote Programming Reference SOURce Subsystem Parameter type Numeric Parameter range freq 1063 to 50e6 lt ampl gt 10e 3 to 10 lt offs gt 4 5 to 4 5 lt duty_cycle gt 0 to 360 APPLy SQUare Response The 397 will return freq ampl offs duty cycle Default values are 1e6 5 0 50 APPLy PULSe lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt delay gt lt rise gt lt high gt lt fall gt Purpose This command is
82. APPLy SINusoid TRIangle SQUare PULSe RAMP 2 SINC 2 T EXPonential GAUSsian DC 2 USER 72 PHASe OFFSet FM 2 DATA DEViation FUNCtion MODE 7 SHAPe 7 FREQuency RASTer TRIGger MODE 2 SLOPe FREQuency RASTer SOURCe DIVider FSK FREQuency RASTer MODE 7 SHAPe ROCSillator SOURCe SWEep STOP 2 TIME 2 5 14 This subsystem is used to control output functions shape and parameters frequency amplitude and amplitude modulation and filler type Optional nodes were omitted from these commands Factory defaults after RST are shown in bold typeface Parameter low and high limits are given where applicable Parameter Form Default Low Limit High OFF ONJ0J1J OFF freq ampl offs phase freq ampl offs phase freq ampl offs duty cycle gt lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt delay gt lt rise gt lt high gt lt fall gt lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt delay gt lt rise gt lt fall gt lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt N_cycles gt lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt exp gt lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt exp gt o ampl gt lt seg gt lt sclk gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt
83. ArbExplorer or any similar application that can generate mathematical coordinates Throughout the description in this manual this modulation type will be referred to as Arbitrary FM Mode The arbitrary waveform you will create and download to the 397 resides in a separate and dedicated memory It can be programmed to have variable length 10 to 20000 points and has a separate and independent sample clock control 9 digits 1mS s to 2MS s The equivalent minimum and maximum modulating frequencies you can generate with the arbitrary FM are 50nHz to 200kHz While the low frequency is very useful in applications like wander and slow drifting oscillators the higher frequencies are as much needed for testing fast modems PLL circuits and for wide band digital modulation technology FM Frequency Defines the rate of the modulating frequency If you use the standard FM mode the maximum modulating frequency is 100kHz Using the arbitrary FM mode the maximum envelope frequency is increased to 200kHz Sample Clik Deviation This parameter specifies the range of which the sample clock frequency will deviate from the carrier frequency setting The deviation range is symmetrical about the carrier frequency As was mentioned before the 397 has an Using the Instrument Generating Modulated Waveforms extremely wide deviation range without scarifying linearity For example you can set 25MS s carrier with 40MS s deviation that is y
84. C Amplitude Programs output amplitude D Offset Programs output offset 1D Phase Parameters depend on selected shape JD Reset Resets parameters for this waveform only Parameters B Arbitrary A Sample Clock Programs sample clock frequency B Amplitude Programs output amplitude C Offset Programs output offset D Segment Selects an active memory segment Number JD Wave Composer Creates custom waveforms JD Delete Clears the entire arbitrary memory Segments C Sequenced A View Table Displays table and provides editing options B Advance Mode Programs the sequence advance mode C Sample Clock Programs the sample clock frequency D Amplitude Programs output amplitude JD Offset Programs output offset JD Active Segment Selects the active segment in the sequence D Modulated A Modulation Type Selects one of AM FM FSK and Sweep B Parameter depends on selected modulation C Parameter depends on selected modulation D Parameter depends on selected modulation JD Parameter depends on selected modulation JD denotes you have to scroll down to access the menu Scroll using the arrows up or down or the dial 3 3 7 397 User Manual Table 3 3 Front Panel Menus continued Soft TOP 2 Level 3 Level Key Menu Menu Menu Notes B Run Mode A Continuous Provides access to continuous mode parameters B Triggered Provides access to triggered mode parameters C Gated Pro
85. E E aA A E EEEE E TE 4 5 4 3 Me Main Panel ciao i Rte eet Rp bee Te ER e bc AA AE 4 8 4 4 The Standard Waveforms Pariel iret rtt on ree adeste deis 4 10 4 5 The Arbitrary amp Sequence Panel 5 ees sse nannten nht aser 4 12 4 6 The Memory Partition Table eeeeseeseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeenn nennen nnn nnn nenne trennen 4 14 4 5 The E ele RE Ve EE 4 16 4 8 The Sequence Table EEn 4 17 4 9 The TIGGER PANS EE 4 19 4510 The Modulation Randstad atlas 4 21 4 11 The Modulation Panel tege stuet tote pe tipa 4 24 4 12 The Utility Panel tror baaa 4 26 4 13 The Multi Instruments Synchronization Dialog Box 4 26 397 User Manual 4 14 The Command Edil oer dene rae oe ep educ cec DA as 4 28 4 15 The Wave Composer Opening Green 4 30 4 16 The Open Waveform Dialog BOX cui iii 4 31 4 17 Zooming In on Waveform Segrmients aeter eterne Eve edet odo Ie never ete 4 34 4 18 Generating Distorted Sine waves from the built in Library ssseeeeeeeeee 4 36 4 19 The Too bar e EE 4 36 4220 The Waveform ocre EE 4 37 4 21 The FM Composer opening Screen non nono nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnes 4 39 4 22 Generating Sine Modulation Using the FM Composer 4 42 4 23 The Equation Editor Dialog BOX stations 4 43 4 24 An Equation Editor Example nennen eene nennen 4 48 4 25 Using the Equation Editor to Modulate Sine Waveforms eeeessssesses 4 49 4 26 Usin
86. FLLIKE 397 Arbitrary Waveform Generator User Manual PN 8000 61360 Date 1 1 2005 O 2005 Fluke Corporation All rights reserved Printed in USA All product names are trademarks of their respective companies LIMITED WARRANTY AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY Each Fluke product is warranted to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service The warranty period is one year and begins on the date of shipment Parts product repairs and services are warranted for 90 days This warranty extends only to the original buyer or end user customer of a Fluke authorized reseller and does not apply to fuses disposable batteries or to any product which in Fluke s opinion has been misused altered neglected contaminated or damaged by accident or abnormal conditions of operation or handling Fluke warrants that software will operate substantially in accordance with its functional specifications for 90 days and that it has been properly recorded on non defective media Fluke does not warrant that software will be error free or operate without interruption Fluke authorized resellers shall extend this warranty on new and unused products to end user customers only but have no authority to extend a greater or different warranty on behalf of Fluke Warranty support is available only if product is purchased through a Fluke authorized sales outlet or Buyer has paid the applicable international price Fluke reserves the right to
87. IXed USER SEQuence Boolean parameters represent a single binary condition that is either true or false The generator accepts OFF or O for a false condition The generator accepts ON or 1 for a true condition The instrument always returns 0 or 1 when a boolean setting is queried The following command uses a boolean parameter OUTP FILT OFF ON The same command can also be written as follows OUTP FILT 0 1 Arbitrary Block Parameters Binary Block Parameters SCPI Syntax and Styles Remote Programming Reference SCPI Syntax and Styles Arbitrary block parameters are used for loading waveforms into the generators memory Depending on which option is installed the Model 397 can accept binary blocks up to 1M bytes The following command uses an arbitrary block parameter that is loaded as binary data TRAC DATA 564000 lt binary block Binary block parameters are used for loading segment and sequence tables into the generator s memory Information on the binary block parameters is given later in this manual Where possible the syntax and styles used in this section follow those defined by the SCPI consortium The commands on the following pages are broken into three columns the KEYWORD the PARAMETER FORM and any NOTES The KEYWORD column provides the name of the command The actual command consists of one or more keywords since SCPI commands are based on a hi
88. MOD TYPE BIT RUN CONT POSITION O Figure 3 25 FSK Parameters FSK Type This provides selection between two transition types Hop and Ramp In Hop frequency hops from carrier and back immediately as the waveform cycle is complete Ramped is similar to Hop except when the shift command is issued the output ramps to the shifted frequency and back at a rate set by the ramp time generator The ramp time is programmable from 10us to 1 second Nj Note Shifted frequency value in Ramped FSK mode must always be higher than the carrier frequency Reverse setting will not allow the 397 to execute ramped FSK operation Also SCLK2 SCLK1 gt 10KHz The Hop FSK is the default function To change to Ramped press the FSK Type soft key and with the arrow down key select the Ramped option Press Enter to lock in the modified parameter Hop Sample CIk Defines the shifted frequency value The 397 will hop to the shifted frequency when commanded to do so Note that the instrument changes the frequencies coherently that is after the shift command is accepted the generator completes the waveform to its last point or phase and only then the next frequency is kicking in This way you can be sure that discontinuities in the output waveforms do not occur While using the FSK IN as hop control the instrument will shift on positive going transitions only Note that the FSK input is level sensitive so although the frequency shifts on transitions
89. Marcano D 2 9 EAN COMU ANON sirio nere tos C D eftt Liu edet oh 2 14 Choosing a Static P Address anode rtr Eege 2 16 397 User Manual 2 2 Installation Overview Unpacking and Initial Inspection Safety Precautions Configuring the Instrument 2 Installation Overview This chapter contains information and instructions necessary to prepare the Model 397 for operation Details are provided for initial inspection grounding safety requirements repackaging instructions for storage or shipment installation information and Ethernet address configuration Unpacking and handling of the generator requires normal precautions and procedures applicable to handling of sensitive electronic equipment The contents of all shipping containers should be checked for included accessories and certified against the packing slip to determine that the shipment is complete The following safety precautions should be observed before using this product Although some instruments and accessories would normally be used with non hazardous voltages there are situations where hazardous conditions may be present A CAUTION This product is intended for use by qualified persons who recognize shock hazards and are familiar with the safety precautions required to avoid possible injury Read the operating information carefully before using the product Exercise extreme caution when a shock hazard is present Lethal voltage may b
90. NT 1 POSITION o SLOPE POSITIUE Figure 3 7 Programming Sample Clock Frequency Divider First select the Outputs menu to gain access to the Channel 2 sample clock frequency divider parameter then 1 Using the dial scroll down to the Divider field 2 Press Enter to edit the Divider value 3 Use the numeric keypad to program the divider value Use integer number only 4 Press Enter to lock in the value Alternately you can modify the sample clock frequency divider value with the dial and arrow keys but then the termination of the process is by pressing Enter Nj Note If you use the dial or arrow keys to modify the channel 2 sample clock frequency divider parameter the output is updated immediately as soon as you modify the parameter The final value will be locked in as soon as you press Enter If you choose to leave the old value press Cancel to terminate the process and to discard of any change made to this parameter Programming the Output amplitude and offset can be programmed independently and separately for each channel Amplitude and offset are set within Amplitude and windows so before you select values for these parameters make Offset sure you do not exceed the limits 3 13 397 User Manual 3 14 Offset for the 397 can be adjusted with 6 digits of resolution nearly 19 bits and amplitude is programmed with 4 digits Amplitude and offset can be programmed independently as long as the followin
91. Note and record the DMM reading Modify 397 amplitude setting to 3 162V Adjust RV3 LIN2 for a DMM reading as was recorded in step 4 10mV Repeat steps 4 and 5 for a few times until the reading is balanced to within 10mV Modify the DMM setting to DCV Repeat the sequence above but this time measuring DC voltage and adjust RV6 ZERO CH2 until you balance the readings between the two amplitude settings to within 10mV 9 Modify 397 amplitude setting to 1V 10 Adjust RV10 NULL2 for a DMM reading of 0 V 2mV 11 Modify 397 amplitude setting to 10V 12 Modify DMM setting to ACV and adjust RV14 AMPL2 for a DMM reading of 3 535 V 20mV 13 Modify 397 amplitude setting to 6V 14 Re adjust RV14 AMPL2 for a DMM reading of 2 121 V 10mV 15 Repeat the sequence above from 11 through 14 until you balance the readings between 10V and 6V settings to within 10mV Di AEO DN 6 27 397 User Manual Channel 2 Offset Fine Adjustment Channel 2 Offset Adjustment 6 28 Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 506 Feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Procedure 1 2 Ors Modify 397 channel 2 amplitude setting to 1V and offset to 4 46484V Modify the DMM setting DCV 20V and connect the front panel CHAN 2 connector to the DMM input Use 50Q Feedthrough termination at the DMM side of the BNC cable Note and record the offset reading on the DMM Modify 397 channel 2 offset to 4 46483V Adjust RV1
92. Options E E E 3 15 3 10 Trigger Run RO 3 17 3 11 Gated Mode Parmalat ii devas perum hd deo sein pede eed iude detec 3 18 3 12 Burst Run Mode Parameters ie e a ENEE ie 3 19 S 13 Arm Parameters titanio 3 19 2 14 SYNC and Filter Parameters asrnane ti 3 20 3 15 Modifying the SCLK and 10MHz Clock Source 3 22 3 16 The Wave Composer Tool for Generating Arbitrary Waveforms eeeseceeeeeeseeeeeeen 3 23 3 17 Programming Arbitrary Waveform Parameters ssssseeeseeseeseerrertereeesrrrinrrnssssrrrrrrrrnee 3 25 3 18 Using ArbExplorer to Generate Geouences Hee 3 26 3 19 Sequence Parameters eene ene enn nnn nnne nnne nnne neris 3 28 3 20 Editing the Sequence KEE 3 30 3 21 Sequence Advance Options tenet tnet t nern nn ennet nannan nna nnn Ennn Ennn nnan n Ennn E nnna 3 32 3 22 Selecting a modulated Waveform A 3 33 3 23 FM Modulation Rara E 3 34 3 24 Using ArbExplorer to Generate Arbitrary Modulating Waveforms 3 38 3 25 FSK Parametels ud aid 3 40 3 26 Sweep Parameiers nr RR RR RR RON RR EEEE EEEE nenne esr enne nnee 3 43 dad f oA E eS ias 3 49 3 28 Adjusting Phase Offset Between Channels AAA 3 50 3 29 Wiring Diagram Master to Slave cccccceeeeeeesseeeeceeeeendeesedaceneteeneeeeessneneeneseeeetenetsees 3 51 3 30 Setting up Master Slave Parameters eese enitn nennen inns 3 52 4 1 Startup amp Communication Opions 4 5 4 2 ArbExplorer s Toolbars sieren rra E
93. Oscilloscope as follows Termination 20dB 50 feedthrough attenuator Setup As required for the test 2 Connect 397 Channel 1 output to the oscilloscope input 3 Configure the function generator as follows Frequency 10kHz Run Mode Triggered Waveform Square wave Amplitude Adjust for TTL level on 500 4 Connect the function generator output to the 397 rear panel TRIG IN connector 5 Connect 397 Ch1 to the Oscilloscope input 6 Configure the 397 channels 1 2 as follows Reset SCLK 100MS s Waveform Sequence SeqAdvance Step Run Mode Triggered Amplitude 2V Output On 7 Using ArbExplorer prepare and download the following waveform Segment 1 Sine 1000 points Segment 2 Triangle 1000 points Segment 3 Square 1000 points Segment 4 Sinc 1000 points Segment 5 Gaussian Pulse 1000 points 8 Using ArbExplorer build and download the following sequence table Step 1 Segment 1 loop 1 Step 2 Segment 2 loop 1 Step 3 Segment 3 loop 1 Step 4 Segment 4 loop 1 Step 5 Segment 5 loop 1 Test Procedure 1 Press the manual trigger button on the function generator and observe that the waveforms advance through the sequence table repeatedly Test Results Pass Fail 2 Remove the cable from 397 channel 1 and connect to channel 2 3 Repeat the test procedure as above for channel 2 6 16 Maintenance and Performance Checks Sequence Operation Test Results Pass Fail
94. Output The channel 1 output connector outputs fixed standard waveforms to 50MHz user arbitrary and sequenced waveforms with sampling clock to 125MS s Output impedance is 500 that is the cable connected to this output should be terminated with 500 Output amplitude accuracy is calibrated when connected to a 500 load The output amplitude is doubled when the output impedance is above 1MO Channel 2 Output The channel 2 output connector outputs fixed standard waveforms to 50MHz user arbitrary and sequenced waveforms with sampling clock to 125MS s Output impedance is 50Q that is the cable connected to this output should be terminated with 500 Output amplitude accuracy is calibrated when connected to a 50Q load The output amplitude is doubled when the output impedance is above 1MO SYNC Output The SYNC output generates a single TTL pulse for synchronizing other instruments i e an oscilloscope to the output waveform The SYNC signal always appears at a fixed point relative to the waveform The location of the SYNC signal along the waveform is programmable The SYNC output is also used as marker output when the sweep function is turned on There are three LED s on the front panel When the output state is Front Panel on the light illuminates There are two LED s one for each channel Indicators and one LED for the SYNC output Front panel controls and keys are grouped in logical order to provide Front Panel efficient and qui
95. PPLy FREQ AMPL OFFS SINusoid FREQ AMPL OFFS PHAS TRlangle FREQ AMPL OFFS PHAS SQUare FREQ AMPL OFFS DCYC PULSe FREQ AMPL OFFS DEL WIDT LEAD TRA RAMP FREQ AMPL OFFS DEL LEAD TRA SINC FREQ AMPL OFFS NCYC GAUSsian FREQ AMPL OFFS EXP EXPonential FREQ AMPL OFFS EXP DC DC AMPL USER SEGM SCLK AMPL OFFS 5 8 Remote Programming Reference SCPI Syntax and Styles Table 5 1 Model 397 SCPI Commands List Summary continued Keyword Parameter Form Default in Bold FREQuency ECW 1e6 100e 6 50e6 MINimum MAXimum RASTer 1e7 100e 3 125e6 MINimum MAXimum SOURce INTernal EXTernal DIVider 1 1 65535 Integers only ROSCillator SOURce INTernal EXTernal PHASe OFFSet 0 0 4M 1 point increments VOLTage LEVel AMPLitude 5 000 10E 3 10 00 MINimum MAXimum OFFSet 0 4 5 4 5 FUNCtion MODE FIXed USER SEQuence SHAPe SINusoid TRlangle SQUare PULSe RAMP SINC GAUSsian EXPonential NOISe DC SlNusoid PHASe 0 0 360 TRlangle PHASe 0 0 360 SQUare DCYCle 50 1 99 PULSe DELay 10 0 99 9 WIDth 10 0 99 9 TRANSition LEADing 10 0 99 9 TRAIling 10 0 99 9 5 9 397 User Manual Table 5 1 Model 397 SCPI Commands List Summary continued
96. Remote Programming Reference Introduction To SCPI 9 Substitute MINimum or MAXimum in place of a parameter for some commands For example consider the following command FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum Instead of selecting a specific frequency substitute MIN to set the frequency to its minimum value or MAX to set the frequency to its maximum value Query the current value of most parameters by adding a question mark to the command For example the following command sets the output function to square SOUR FUNC SHAP SQU Query the output function by executing SOUR FUNC SHAP The response to a query depends on the format of the command In general a response to a query contains current values or settings of the generator Commands that set values can be queried for their current value Commands that set modes of operation can be queried for their current mode IEEE STD 488 2 common queries generate responses which are common to all IEEE STD 488 2 compatible instruments A command string sent to the function generator must terminate with a new line character The IEEE STD 488 EOI message is a new line character Command string termination always resets the current SCPI command path to the root level The IEEE STD 488 2 standard defines a set of common commands that perform functions like reset trigger and status operations Common commands begin with an asterisk are four to five ch
97. Sine Wave Distortion ooooiccnnnnccnnonccnccccnnnncnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnns 6 10 SING wave Spectral e E 6 11 Trigger Operati 2 esaet ane rc ene ofa te A ond ofa vede pe ved cll vuv A cared Du Tw eee 6 12 Trigger Gate and RT EE 6 12 MEQ OSE SIO DG suis c 6 12 A et epee tt oret ER 6 13 Internal Trigger ACCUFaGy rei iiti nie tt rn he eh ci e in ta d ede vd e eee 6 14 Sequence Operation oocccccccccoonccnccccccccnnnonccnnnnoconnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnrrnnnncnnnnnnnnass 6 15 NN 6 15 Ee Re Wee 6 16 Single AAV ANC e 6 17 Modulated Waveforms Characteristics sees 6 18 ee 6 18 6 1 397 User Manual cela E 6 19 e NEE 6 19 FM Std Waveiorms 6 21 FM Arb zMWavetorms ucc bene dia 6 22 AM ihoni ap a aE lin een e E 6 23 Acus iMac 6 24 INTROGUCTION WEE 6 24 Description t 6 24 Environmental Conditions 6 24 Required Equipment ccccccceccceeecccceeeeeeeeeeceeaaeaaaeeeeeeeceaaaeaaaeeeeeeeeesaaeaaeeeeeseseeseaaees 6 24 nialinstrumnent Setting tania pud e o ur D p tei pies ote tete 6 25 Adjustment eer 6 25 DDS Duty Cycle Adjustment iieri eru eae ane 6 25 Sine Out Offset Adjustment eieeeccceccee ccce eeecccece ce ccce cce c rece re rer ererneererA 6 25 TCXO Frequency Adjustment eene nnn nnn nnn 6 25 Channel 1 Amplitude and Balance Adiustment 6 26 Channel 1 Offset Fine Adjustment ooccoc
98. TION O SLOPE POSITIVE Figure 3 20 Editing the Sequence Table As was explained above the 397 steps through an index of links It may loop a few times on a designated link and eventually after the last link the process repeats itself Stepping from link to link through the sequence table is done automatically by the instrument However there are applications requiring control when and how the link is stepped The 397 has a number of sequence advance options Auto Stepped Single and Mixed These advance modes are described in the following Automatic specifies continuous advance where the generator steps continuously and automatically through the links to the end of the sequence table and then repeats the sequence from the start For example if a sequence is made of three segments 1 2 and Using the Instrument Generating Sequenced Waveforms 3 and AUTO mode is used the sequence will generate an infinite number of 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 waveforms Of course each link segment can be programmed with its associated loop repeat number AUTO is the default sequence advance mode Note to use this mode the 397 must be in continuous operating mode Stepped Using this advance mode the sequence is advanced to the next link only when a valid trigger is received The output of the 397 generates the first segment continuously until a trigger signal advances the sequence to the next link If repeats were selected for a s
99. UDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE FLUKE SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES INCLUDING LOSS OF DATA ARISING FROM ANY CAUSE OR THEORY Since some countries or states do not allow limitation of the term of an implied warranty or exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages the limitations and exclusions of this warranty may not apply to every buyer If any provision of this Warranty is held invalid or unenforceable by a court or other decision maker of competent jurisdiction such holding will not affect the validity or enforceability of any other provision Fluke Corporation Fluke Europe B V P O Box 9090 P O Box 1186 Everett WA 98206 9090 5602 BD Eindhoven U S A The Netherlands 11 04 To register your product online visit register fluke com FOR YOUR SAFETY Before undertaking any troubleshooting maintenance or exploratory procedure read care fully the WARNINGS and CAUTION notices This equipment contains voltage hazardous to human life and safety and is capable of in flicting personal injury If this instrument is to be powered from the AC line mains through an autotransformer ensure the common connector is connected to the neutral earth pole of the power supply Before operating the unit ensure the conductor green wire is connected to the ground earth conductor of the pow
100. VETUNAG melio wr PE 4 45 Equation Conventions cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeaaeeeeeeeeeesaaaeaaeeeeeessaaeneeees 4 45 Typing E guatis an one onanan a a aaa aeaea iai a a iA 4 46 Eouatton Gamples 4 47 Combining Waveform S ar erreian dt am erie eE tod EAEAN a AE aA TR EE R A ETE Ra tated abies 4 52 the Pulse ConmiposSQr a u 0d eve eae eere ieee E AA dd AAA AA 4 54 4 2 What s in This Chapter Introduction to ArbExplorer Installing ArbExplorer ArbExplorer What s in This Chapter This Chapter contains information how to install invoke and use ArbExplorer Introduction to ArbExplorer and examples how to program instrument controls and parameters and how to generate waveforms and download them to the 397 are also given in the following sections In general ArbExplorer is a utility program that serves as an aid for programming the Model 397 ArbExplorer has many functions and features of which all of them share a common purpose controlling 397 functions from remote As minimum to use ArbExplorer you ll need the following tools Computer Pentium III or better Windows 2000 XP or higher High resolution screen at least 1024 x 768 pixels Pointing device mouse or ball Visa 2 6 or higher installation LA EI T Last but not least some basic knowledge how to operate computers and Windows based programs ArbExplorer operation is divided into three main functions 1 Front panel contro
101. WAVEFORM GENERATOR on era fourrur sync LGL Ge KT 10 000 00kHz 2 4 BASE MODE P FUNC ARE TYPE BIT 12 RUN BURST POSITION 6 Figure 3 9 Run Mode Options 3 5 3 15 397 User Manual Triggered Mode 3 16 Nj Note Burst run mode is shown in Figure 3 9 as an example however the following description applies to all Run Modes In general a specific run mode is selected from the Run Modes soft key menu The screen as shown in Figure 3 9 is displayed Proceed to select the run mode and to program parameters as follows 1 Press one of the soft keys to select from Continuous Triggered Gated or burst The output will immediately be updated with the selected run mode 2 Use the arrow keys or the dial to scroll down to the parameter field you want to modify 3 Press Enter to edit the Divider value Use the arrow keys or the dial to modify the edited parameter 5 Press Enter to lock in the value A In Triggered mode the output remains at a zero DC level as long as the trigger signal to the rear panel remains inactive The trigger input is sensitive to either a rising edge or a falling edge of a trigger signal Each time a transition occurs at the trigger input the 397 generates one complete output waveform At the end of the output cycle the output resumes position at a DC level that is equal to the amplitude of the last point of the waveform There are four parameters you can adjust for this mode
102. Y ei 6 9 6 6 Square wave Characteristics Tests 6 9 6 7 Front Panel Sine wave Distortions Test 6 10 6 8 Rear Panel Sine wave Distortions Test Ree 6 10 6 9 Front Panel Sine wave Spectral Purity Test 6 11 6 10 Rear Panel Sine wave Spectral Purity Test 6 11 0 11 Trigger gate and burst Characteristics erede tit 6 12 6 12 Internal Trigger Generator Operation eeeeseeeseeeeeeeneeeneren en nennnns 6 14 6 12 Required Equipment riia eth ee y ey ree i Fee a E e REY ee 6 24 viii List of Figures Chapter Title Page 1 1 TheModel caia e pe dire rre ep ed eade ea eu ead NE 4 1 1 2 ArbExplorer The Control Panels ssssssssssssssse eee 5 1 1 3 ArbExplorer The Wave Composer ssssssssseseseessertrrrtrrrrrtrtrrrttrrtrrrrtrrrtrrrtrrrtrrrtrrrtrtttent 5 1 1 4 ArbExplorer The FM Wave Composer emer 6 1 1 5 ArbExplorer The Pulse Composer eee 6 1 1 6 397 Front Panel Controls sse em nemen eene nennen 11 1 1 75 M del 397 Rear Pariel rm codo aa d e E HL E d A ERR E a 13 1 1 8 Segment 1 Sin x x Waveform coiere dete ades denda een eee b deu eeu 19 1 1 9 Segment 2 Sine Waveform eese ena 19 1 1 10 Segment 3 Pulse Waveform eeseeeeeeeeenieeeneeee nennen ennt ntn tnnt nitentes 20 1 1 11 Sequenced Waveforms esses eene nen nnne nennen nnn en nnne nnns 20 1 2 1 Sel
103. adapters Ports COM amp LPT EI Communications Port COMI Y ECP Printer Port LPT1 4 USB Serial Port COM3 Processors Sound video and game controllers System devices Universal Serial Bus controllers Standard Universal PCI to USB Host Controller Standard Universal PCI to USB Host Controller USB Root Hub USB Root Hub Figure 2 10 Model 397 Configured for USB Operation LAN Configuration 2 14 There are several parameters that you may have to set to establish network communications using the LAN interface Primarily you ll need to establish an IP address You may need to contact your network administrator for help in establishing communications with the LAN interface To change LAN configuration you need to access the LAN 10 100 screen as shown in Figure 2 11 To access this screen press the TOP menu button then select the Utility soft key and scroll down with the dial to the Remote Setup option and press the Enter key The LAN 10 100 soft key will update the display with the LAN parameters Note there are some parameters that are shown on the display that cannot be accessed or modified These are Physical Address and Host Name These parameters are set in the factory and are unique for product The only parameters that can be modified are the IP Address the Subnet mask and the Default gateway Correct setting of these parameters is essential for correct interfacing with the LAN network Description of the LAN set
104. adapters you are using to communicate with the Ethernet device from the drop down list 2 397 User Manual 2 18 Chapter 3 Using the Instrument Title Page EEN EEIT etse iate bebes 3 3 liter chamiel Dependencia tuc pesca Bee oblea et Du a edt ue 3 3 lie eat UI 3 3 Input Output Protector s esae A p t s 3 3 Power On Reset Defaults coi ttt qb e RI MASALA Mosa a a AU DG tA M Aoc s ae 3 3 Controlling the 391 xod uiti te ictu Sege Te 3 5 Enabling the Outputs ui dida 3 8 Selecting a Waveform Type a e bl le et o e O 3 9 Changing the Output Frequency c ccecccccsneccneecneeeneeneeeeneesneeeaeenaeeaenenaenneneneeenenes 3 10 Changing the Sample Clock Freoguency 3 11 Dividing the Sample Clock for Channel 2 3 12 Programming the Amplitude and Offset eee ce 3 13 Selecting a Run Mode uei daa tia diia lia 3 15 MPEG GST MOUS C H 3 16 GATO MOE a A E 3 17 Burst MOUS iif ici wigs o bet ien open funis od 3 18 Using the Arm Feature source 3 19 Using the Manual Trigger enne nnne nennen nne 3 20 Using the SYNC ett 3 20 eene 3 21 Selecting the SCLK Source and Reference oococccocococoonconococooooconoconoconocanecanacanese 3 21 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms c ccccsccnecscneeneeeeneeneeeeeeenneecneenaneaencnaeeneneeeeeeenes 3 22 What Are Arbitrary Waveiomms AAA 3 23 Generating Arbitrary WaveformS eeeee
105. ain panel will now be accessible But before we go into panel operation let s look at the toolbars at the left top of the screen as shown in Figure 4 2 X ArbExplorer lt lt Fluke gt gt Untitled cad lol x File View System Help Link be Offline dl D c Y Panels MAIN STD ARB TRIG MOD1 MOD2 UTIL WAVE FM PULSE Figure 4 2 ArbExplorer s Toolbars 4 5 397 User Manual ArbExplorer Features The Control Panels 4 6 The standard Windows Menu Bar is the top bar It provides access to main system controls like saving files and viewing or removal of screen images The second bar is called Link bar It provides direct access to different instruments that are active on the active interface bus ArbExplorer can control a number of 397 units simultaneously If the instruments were connected to the interface while invoking ArbExplorer they will automatically be detected by the program and will be placed in the Link pull down window The active instrument is displayed with its associated address If you run ArbExplorer in offline mode the Link bar will show 397 Offline The Panels bar provides direct access to instrument control panels The individual control panels are explained later in this chapter The MAIN STD ARB TRIG MOD1 and the other buttons will bring up to the screen panels that are associated with these names The WAVE and FM buttons will open the waveform and FM wave
106. ame first three numbers The IP addresses in this table are for example purposes only If you are setting up your own network you probably do not have a gateway so you should set these values to 0 0 0 0 Table 2 1 Valid and Invalid IP Addresses for Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 IP Address Comment 123 234 45 213 Valid The first three numbers match the previous IP address The fourth number must be a unique number in the range of 1 to 254 123 202 45 214 Invalid Second number does not match the previous IP addresses The first three numbers must match on all IP addresses with subnet mask 255 255 255 0 123 234 45 0 Invalid The first three numbers are valid but the fourth number cannot be 0 123 234 45 255 Invalid The first three numbers are valid but the fourth number cannot be 255 2 16 Configuring the Instrument Selecting a Remote interface y TIP To find out the network settings for your computer perform the following steps e For Windows 98 Me 2000 XP 1 Open a DOS prompt 2 Type IPCONFIG 3 Press lt Enter gt If you need more information you can run ipconfig with the fall option by typing IPCONFIG all at the DOS prompt This shows you all of the settings for the computer Make sure you use the settings for the LAN adapter you are using to communicate with the LAN device e For Windows 95 1 Open a DOS prompt 2 Type WINIPCFG 3 Press lt Enter gt Select the Ethernet
107. ameter affects the 397 when set to operate in FM FUNC MODE USER FM sclk will set the sample clock frequency of the modulating waveform Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt FM_sclk gt 1e 3 to 2e6 in units of samples per second FM FREQuency RASTer Response and default The 397 will return the present modulating waveform sample clock frequency value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 1kHz would be returned as 1E3 positive numbers are unsigned Default value is 1 e6 FM TRIGger MODE CONTinuous TRIGered GATEd Purpose This command will select one of the FM modes e CONTinuous will select continuous modulation e TRIGered will select triggered modulation GATEd will select gated modulation Parameter type Discrete FM TRIGger MODE Response and default The 397 will return CONT TRIG or GATE depending on its present setting Default is CONT FM TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative Purpose This command will select slope sensitivity for the FM trigger input e POSitive will select rising edge e NEGative will select falling edge Parameter type Discrete FM TRIGger SLOPe Response and default The 397 will return POS or NEG depending on its present setting Default is POS 5 24 Remote Programming Reference SOURce Subsystem FREQuency lt freq gt MINimum MAXimum Purpose This command modifies the frequency of the standard waveform in units of hertz Hz It has no a
108. ample in the above syntax statement FREQ and FREQUENCY are both acceptable forms Use upper or lowercase letters Therefore FREQ FREQUENCY freq and Freq are all acceptable Other forms such as FRE and FREQUEN will generate an error The above syntax statement shows the frequency parameter enclosed in triangular brackets The brackets are not sent with the command string A value for the frequency parameter such as FREQ 50e 6 must be specified Some parameters are enclosed in square brackets The brackets indicate that the parameter is optional and can be omitted The brackets are not sent with the command string A colon is used to separate a command keyword from a lower level keyword as shown below SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN A semicolon is used to separate commands within the same subsystem and can also minimize typing For example sending the following command string TRIG SLOP NEG COUN 10 TIM 5e 3 is the same as sending the following three commands TRIG SLOP NEG TRIG COUN 10 TRIG TIM 5e 3 Use the colon and semicolon to link commands from different subsystems For example in the following command string an error is generated if both the colon and the semicolon are not used OUTP STATE ON TRIG BURS ON The MIN and MAX Parameters Querying Parameter Setting Query Response Format SCPI Command Terminator IEEE STD 488 2 Common Commands
109. amples are given in the following paragraphs to show you how to generate various FM modes Example 1 Modulating This example will show how to generate frequency modulation Standard Waveforms using the standard waveforms and the Standard FM Mode The Using the Standard FM output frequency will be set to 1MHz Deviation Range to 100kHz Mode and 100Hz sine as the modulating waveform We ll monitor the frequency modulation from the front panel outputs then compare the results to the rear panel sine output connector Before we start setting up the modulation parameters we need to get some information from the instrument Do the following Select the Sine waveform from the Standard Waveform library and then program the Frequency parameter to be 1MHz Observe and note that the SCLK parameter is showing 64MS s Note that in the standard waveform mode the SCLK parameter is set automatically by the instrument and cannot be modified directly The information that we need from this display is the number of points that the 397 3 35 397 User Manual Example 2 Modulating Standard Waveforms Using the Arbitrary FM Mode 3 36 requires to generate 1MHz We can find this out from SCLK Frequency relationship 64M 1M 64 points Note this number It will be required later to compute the deviation range parameter We are now ready to proceed with programming the FM parameters Continue with the following procedure 1 Press TOP soft key and p
110. ance to the next step 1 Refer to Figure 3 19 and select the Advance Mode with the appropriate soft key The advance mode options as shown in Figure 3 21 will display Use the dial or arrow keys to scroll down to the required mode and press Enter to lock in the selected mode 3 31 397 User Manual Generating Modulated Waveforms 3 32 Get View gt Table Advance Automatic Step Mode Mixed o bag hades Sample Clock Amplitude AUTO BASE MODE SYNC OUT ARM OFF FUNC SEG TYPE BIT 1 BREAKPOINT 1 RUN CONT POSITION SLOPE POSITIVE Figure 3 21 Sequence Advance Options B Note The operating mode of the instrument as selected from the Run Modes menu affects the way that the 397 lets you access the sequence advance mode parameter If you are in continuous mode as shown in Figure 3 21 you can select one of AUTO STEP or MIXED If you already selected the triggered run mode you ll be able to select from AUTO or SINGLE only as advance modes Utilizing DDS direct digital synthesis technology the Model 397 is extremely frequency agile Changing the sample clock frequency is as easy as changing bits at the DDS control The DDS has an extremely wide dynamic range with excellent linearity throughout the complete range The properties of the DDS are passed on directly to the output therefore the frequency is modulated within an extremely wide band without loosing linearity For example th
111. and default The 397 will return INT or EXT depending on the present 397 setting Default value is INT SWEep STOP lt stop_scik gt Purpose This command will set the stop sample clock frequency When set to operate in sweep mode the 397 will sweep from carrier sample clock frequency to sweep stop sample clock frequency e lt stop_sclk gt will set the sweep stop sample clock frequency for the sweep mode Parameter type Numeric 5 28 Remote Programming Reference SOURce Subsystem Parameter range stop sclk 100e 3 to 12566 in units of samples per second SWEep STOP Response and default The 397 will return the present sweep stop sample clock frequency value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 1kHz would be returned as 1E3 positive numbers are unsigned Default value is 2066 SWEep TIME time Purpose This command will set the time it takes for the sample clock frequency to sweep from carrier to stop frequencies This parameter will effect the 397 only when the instrument is set to operate in sweep mode lt time gt will set the sweep time Parameter type Numeric Parameter range time 1e 3 to 1000 in units of seconds SWEep TIME Response and default The 397 will return the present sweep time value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 10ms would be returned as 10E 3 positive numbers are unsigned Default value is 1e 3 SWEep DIRectio
112. and waveform studio screens The Waveform Partition button opens a screen as shown in Figure 4 6 and the Waveform Studio button opens a screen as shown in Figure 4 7 Information how to use these screens is given in the following paragraphs Using the Memory If you want to learn more about waveform memory and segment Partition Table control you should refer to section 3 of this manual In general the 397 can generate arbitrary waveforms but before it can generate waveforms they must be downloaded to the instrument from a host computer Waveforms are downloaded to the instrument as coordinates and are stored in the 397 in a place designated as waveform memory The waveform memory has a finite size of 4M Having such long memory does not necessarily mean that you have to use the entire memory every time you download a waveform On the contrary the 397 allows segmentation of the memory so that up to 4096 smaller waveforms could be stored in this memory There are two ways to divide the waveform memory to segments 1 Define a segment and load it with waveform data define the next and load with data then the third etc or 2 Use what ArbExplorer has to offer and that is to make up one long waveform that contains many smaller segments download it to the instrument in one shot and then download a memory partition table that splits the entire waveform memory into the required segment sizes Want to use it Here is how it is done Point an
113. ange the order of precedence The following table summarize the mathematical expressions and their respective abbreviated commands that can be used with the Equation Editor 4 45 397 User Manual Typing Equations 4 46 Equation Editor Operands A Raise to the power Multiply Divide Add Subtract Parentheses e Base of natural Logarithm pi 7 Circumference of unit diameter circle per Horizontal wavelength in points f l per omg Q 2 r per amp Amplitude in units of points or seconds sin x The sine of x cos x The cosine of x tan x The tangent of x ctn x The cotangent of x log x The base IO logarithm of x In x The natural base e logarithm of x abs x The absolute value of x 1E 20 1E 20 Numerals equation constants x argument mathematical expression After you get familiar with the operands and conventions you can commence with a few simple equations and see what they do to your waveform screen Once you ll get the feel you ll be able to explore your own creativity to generate much more complicated and complex waveforms If you remember from your old high school studies the simplest curve of Y as a function of X is defined by the equation Y aX b You can use the same technique to generate straight lines with the Equation Editor Assuming first that p 0 try this Amplitude p 21000 Press Preview and see what you get Of course you get an uninteresting line that run
114. annel 1 as follows Reset Frequency As specified in Table 6 1 Waveform Square wave Amplitude 1V Output On Test Procedure 1 Perform frequency Accuracy tests using Table 6 1 Table 6 2 Frequency Accuracy 100 0000kHz 2 Configure model 397 to accept external 10MHz reference Make sure that the external reference accuracy is better than 1ppm 3 Perform Frequency Accuracy tests using Table 6 2 Table 0 3 Frequency Accuracy Using External 10MHz Reference 10 00000MHz 0 1ppm 25 00000MHz 0 1ppm 50 00000MHz 0 1ppm 6 7 397 User Manual Amplitude Accuracy Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Termination 50Q feedthrough at the DMM input Function ACV 2 Connect 397 Channel 1 2 output to the DMM input 3 Configure the 397 channels 1 2 as follows Reset Frequency 1KHz Amplitude As specified in Table 6 3 Output On Test Procedure 4 Perform amplitude Accuracy tests on both channels using Table 6 3 Table 6 4 Amplitude Accuracy DMM Reading 397 Setting Error Limits 10 00 V 3 534 V 53 0 mV 5 000 V 1 767 V 26 5 mV 1 000 V 353 4 mV 5 30 mV 100 0 mV 35 34 mV 2 35 mV 10 00 mV 3 534 mV 0 235 mV Offset Accuracy Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Termination 50Q feedthrough at the DMM input Function DCV 2 Connect 397 Channel 1 2 output to the DMM input 3 Configure the 397 channels 1 2 as follows Reset F
115. aracters in length and may include one or more parameters The command keyword is separated from the first parameter by a blank space Use a semicolon to separate multiple commands as shown below RST STB 2p A DN 5 5 397 User Manual SCPI Parameter Type 5 6 Numeric Parameters Discrete Parameters Boolean Parameters The SCPI language defines four different data formats to be used in program messages and response messages numeric discrete boolean and arbitrary block Commands that require numeric parameters will accept all commonly used decimal representations of numbers including optional signs decimal points and scientific notation Special values for numeric parameters like MINimum and MAXimum are also accepted Engineering unit suffices with numeric parameters e g MHz or kHz can also be sent If only specific numeric values are accepted the function generator will ignore values which are not allowed and will generate an error message The following command is an example of a command that uses a numeric parameter VOLT AMPL lt amplitude gt Discrete parameters are used to program settings that have a limited number of values e FIXed USER and SEQuence They have short and long form command keywords Upper and lowercase letters can be mixed Query responses always return the short form in all uppercase letters The following command uses discrete parameters SOUR FUNC MODE F
116. at we get there to what we see on the front panel Remove the cable from the main output connector and connect to the rear panel SINE OUT connector Here is what you should expect to see when you check this output Carrier waveform is around 1V into 500 carrier frequency is 64MHz deviated 3 2MHz above and below the carrier frequency setting modulating waveform frequency is 100Hz Using the Instrument Generating Modulated Waveforms Example 3 Modulating In Examples 1 and 2 above we showed you how to frequency Arbitrary waveforms modulate standard waveforms You can use these examples as Using the Arbitrary FM guideline for modulating arbitrary waveforms Generating arbitrary Mode waveforms was discussed earlier in this chapter so before you try modulating such waveforms make sure that you first familiarize yourself with the arbitrary waveform generation techniques In general arbitrary waveforms are made of waveform data and sample clock The rate of the sample clock determines the frequency of the output waveform For example if your sample clock is 1MS s and your waveform segment is 1000 points long the frequency of the waveform is 1M 1000 1kHz The above example is somewhat oversimplified What is important to remember is that regardless if you are generating standard or arbitrary waveforms the FM function modulates the sample clock and the parameters that you program for FM affects the SINE OUT signal directly while the f
117. ation section in this chapter for instructions how to install the USB driver Direct connection between a single host computer and a single device with 10 100 BaseT is possible but you must use a special cable that has its transmit and receive lines crossed If your site is already wired connect the 397 via twisted pair Ethernet cable Take care that you use twisted pair wires designed for 10 100 BaseT network use phone cables will not work Refer interconnection issues to your network administrator After you connect the 397 to the LAN port proceed to the LAN Configuration section in this chapter for instructions how to set up LAN parameters The 397 is supplied by the factory with the active remote interface set to USB If you intend to use USB connection then all you need to do is connect your USB cable and proceed with the USB Configuration instructions as given in this chapter to install the USB driver and to configure the USB port first connection only If you already used your instrument in various platforms and want to re select your interface To select an active Interface you need to access the Select Interface screen as shown in Figure 2 1 To access this screen press the TOP menu button then select the Utility soft key and scroll down with the dial to the Remote Setup option and press the Enter key The Select Interface soft key will update the display with the interface parameters Use the curser keys left and right to poi
118. auses the generator to send the contents of the Status Byte register and the MSS Master Summary Status summary message as a single NR1 Numeric Response Message element The response represents the sum of the binary weighted values of the Status Byte Register The STB common query does not alter the status byte Removing the reasons for service from Auxiliary Status registers can clear the entire Status Byte register Sending the CLS command to the device after a SCPI command terminator and before a Query clears the Standard Event Status Register and clears the output queue of any unread messages With the output queue empty the MAV summary message is set to FALSE Methods of clearing other auxiliary status registers are discussed in the following paragraphs The Service Request enable register is an 8 bit register that enables corresponding summary messages in the Status Byte Register Thus the application programmer can select reasons for the generator to issue a service request by altering the contents of the Service Request Enable Register The Service Request Enable Register is read with the SRE common query The response to this query is a number that represents the sum of the binary weighted value of the Service Request Enable Register The value of the unused bit 6 is always Zero The Service Request Enable Register is written using the SRE command followed by a decimal value representing the bit values of the Register A
119. ber of digits that follow e 12 is the number of bytes to follow This number must divide by 8 The generator accepts binary data as 48 bit integers which are sent in two byte words Therefore the total number of bytes is always six times the number of sequence steps For example 12 bytes are required to download 2 sequence steps to the sequence table The IEEE STD 488 2 definition of Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data format is demonstrated in Figure 5 1 The transfer of definite length arbitrary 5 53 397 User Manual block data must terminate with the EOI bit set This way carriage return CR OdH and line feed LF Dal characters can be used as sequence data and will not cause unexpected termination of the arbitrary block data binary block Represents sequence table data The segment table data is made of 48 bit words however the GPIB link has 8 data bas lines and accepts 8 bit words only Therefore the data has to be prepared as 48 bit words and rearranged as six 8 bit words before it can be used by the 397 as sequence table data There are a number of points you should be aware of before you start preparing the data 1 Each channel has its own sequence table buffer Therefore make sure you selected the correct active channel with the INST SEL command before you download sequence table data to the generator 2 Minimum number of sequencer steps is 1 maximum number is 2048 3 The number of bytes in a compl
120. bit value of 1 indicates an enabled condition Consequently a bit value of zero indicates a disabled condition The Service Request Enable Register is cleared by sending SREO The generator always ignores the value of bit 6 Summary of SRE commands is given in the following SREO Clears all bits in the register SRE1 Not used SRE2 Not used SRE4 Not used SRE8 Not used SRE16 Service request on MAV SRE32 Service request on ESB summary bit SRE128 Not used Standard Event Status Register ESR Remote Programming Reference IEEE STD 488 2 Common Commands and Queries The Standard Event Status Register reports status for special applications The 8 bits of the ESR have been defined by the IEEE STD 488 2 as specific conditions which can be monitored and reported back to the user upon request The Standard Event Status Register is destructively read with the ESR common query The Standard Event Status Register is cleared with a CLS common command with a power on and when read by ESR The arrangement of the various bits within the register is firm and is required by all GPIB instruments that implement the IEEE STD 488 2 Description of the various bits is given in the following Bit 0 Operation Complete Generated in response to the OPC command It indicates that the device has completed all selected and pending operations and is ready for a new command Bit 1 Request Control This bit ope
121. ble will be updated automatically when you exit the Edit Table screen however the output will change to the new settings only after you re enter the sequence function Edit Step Provides entry point to the table You may scroll between the fields using the arrow keys If you want to edit a specific step place the cursor on the step and press Enter Edit the field as required and press Enter again to lock in the new value 3 29 397 User Manual Selecting Sequence Advance Modes 3 30 Insert Step Allows adding another step to the sequence table You have a choice of adding the step above or below the cursor line or at the end of the sequence table Go to Step Provides entry point to the sequence table at a specific step number Continue editing the step as described above Delete Step Use this command to delete a specific step from the sequence You ll be asked to confirm if you really want to delete the step before the final execution Delete Table Use this command to delete the entire sequence table You ll be asked to confirm if you really want to delete the step before the final execution Y Tip Use the arrow keys or the dial to scroll through the edit parameters The Apply Changes will remain at the top while the others may be accessed selectively ES ERC Jas J _orr es 16 1 3 se Go To 2 Step AUTO 58 BRSE MODE SYNC QUT ARM OFF FUNC SEG TYPE BIT 1 BRERKPOINT 1 RUN CONT POSI
122. bstructions to its rear fan to ensure proper airflow A CAUTION Using the 397 without proper airflow will result in damage to the instrument 2 5 397 User Manual Installing Software Utilities Controlling the Instrument from Remote Connecting to a Remote interface 2 6 The 397 is supplied with a CD that contains the following programs IVI Driver ArbExplorer USB driver and some other utilities to aid you with the operation of the instrument For bench operation all that you need from the CD is this manual however it is recommended that you stow away the CD in a safe place in case you ll want to use the 397 from a host computer or in a system The VI driver is a useful utility that provides standard communication and commands structure to control the 397 from remote Programming examples are also available to expedite your software development The IVI driver comes free with the 397 however you ll need the IVI engine and visa32 dll run time utilities to be able to use the IVI driver The additional utilities can be downloaded for free from Ne National instrument web site www ni com ArbExplorer is a user friendly program that lets you control instruments functions and features from a remote computer It also lets you generate and edit arbitrary waveforms on the screen build sequence tables modulating signals and much more and then download the signals to your 397 without the hustle of writing complex programs
123. ccccccocoocccconnconnnancccnnnnnnnnonnnanncnnnnnncnnnnnnnns 6 26 Channel 1 Offset Adjustment oooooooccccccccccccccnonnnnnncnnnonnnnncnnnnnncnnnnnnnnncnnnnnncnnnnnnnass 6 27 Channel 2 Amplitude and Balance Adiustment 6 27 Channel 2 Offset Fine Adjustment occococccccccocoocccconnnonnnanccnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnccnnnnncnnnnnnnno 6 28 Channel 2 Offset Adjustment ooooooooccccnnccccncononnnnnccnnnonannncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnncnnnnnnnns 6 28 Updating 397 Firmware ici died indian Gawd E SONO SX RU ESQUINA Gas 6 29 6 2 Maintenance and Performance Checks What s in This Chapter Whats in This This chapter provides maintenance and service information performance tests and the procedures necessary to adjust and Chapter troubleshoot the Model 397 Universal Waveform Generator A WARNING The procedures described in this section are for use only T by qualified service personnel Many of the steps covered SK OO NOT OPEN in this section may expose the individual to potentially lethal voltages that could result in personal injury or death if normal safety precautions are not observed CAUTION sem O ss ALWAYS PERFORM DISASSEMBLY REPAIR AND m X CLEANING AT A STATIC SAFE WORKSTATION Disassembly If it is necessary to troubleshoot the instrument or replace a Instructions component use the following procedure to remove the side panels 1 Using a Phillips head screwdriver remove the screws from the top and bottom covers 2 Carefully
124. ce is accurate to 1ppm The display and modify the SCLK or the 10MHz clock source press TOP then Utility and scroll down to the System option 7 175 Model ID 397 224 Serial Number 0000666 Software Version 0 93D ST Yersion Date 24 Nov 2004 12 04 Calibration Date Not calibrated Installed Memory 4M Pts per channel Clock Source 10 MHz INT SCLK INT d BRSE MODE SYNC OUT TRIGGERED EXT FUNC STD TYPE BIT START Pt amp RUN TRIG POSITION O SLOPE POSITIUE Figure 3 15 Modifying the SCLK and 10MHz Clock Source In general the Model 397 cannot by itself create arbitrary waveforms If you want to use arbitrary waveforms you must first load them into the instrument The 397 is supplied with waveform creation and editing called ArbExplorer Besides waveform generation ArbExplorer has instrument control features sequence table generator FM and pulse composers and many other features that will be described separately Figure 3 16 shows an example of a waveform that was created with the ArbExplorer Once the waveform is created on the screen downloading it to the 397 is just a click of a mouse away Detailed information on the structure of the arbitrary waveform and the commands that are needed to download arbitrary waveforms to the 397 is given in Chapter 5 Information in this Chapter will give you some general idea what arbitrary waveforms are all about Using the Instrument Generating
125. ce to the next segment If repeats were selected for a segment the loop counter is executed automatically e In SINGle advance mode the generator idles between steps until a valid trigger signal is sensed This mode operates with trigger mode only An attempt to select the SING advance mode when the 397 is in continuous operating mode will generate an error After trigger the generator outputs one waveform cycle Then the output level idles at a DC level equal to the last point of the last generated waveform If loops repeats were programmed the output will repeat this segment every time a trigger is received Only after executing all of the programmed loops will the sequence step to the next assigned segment e MlXed mode is a special mode which combines continuous step advance with single step advance in a sequence There are three conditions for the sequence generator to operate in this mode 1 The 397 must be set to operate in continuous mode 2 Select the MIX sequence advance mode Remote Programming Reference TRACe Subsystem 3 Assign the mixed mode bits for each sequence step in your SEQ DEF command 0 programs normal advance 1 programs trigger advance Step with a 0 bit assigned to it will advance automatically to the next step If 1 is assigned to a step the instrument will generate this step and its associated number of repeats continuously and only a valid trigger signal will advance this step to the next s
126. ch Proper termination is also required for accurate amplitude levels at the output connectors Use 50 cables and terminate the main and SYNC cables with terminating resistors Always place the 500 termination at the far end of the cables The Model 397 provides protection for internal circuitry connected to input and output connectors Refer to the specifications in Appendix A to determine the level of protection associated with each input or output connector The 397 utilizes non volatile memory backup that automatically stores the last setup before the generator was turned off Every time you turn on the instrument the non volatile memory updates the front panel setting with modes parameters and waveforms from its last setting with only one exception for safety reasons the outputs remain off even if they were turned on before powering down the 397 3 3 397 User Manual 3 4 MENU MODE y RIGGEREL EXT t ARB TYPE BIT 1 START Pt G RUN TRIG POSITION SLOPE POSITIVE After power on the instrument displays information messages and updates the display with the last setup information The 397 can always be reset to its default values Information on how to restore default parameters is given below If you are not yet fully familiar with front panel operation of the 397 you may find yourself locked into a dead end situation where nothing operates the way it should The fastest way to restore the generator to a
127. ck access to instrument functions and parameters Controls Refer to Figure 1 6 throughout the following description to learn the purpose and effect of each front panel control MENU Getting Started 1 4 Figure 1 6 397 Front Panel Controls The index numbers in the following point to the numbered arrows in Figure 1 6 1 2 Power Switch Toggles 397 power ON and OFF Menu Top Selects the root menu This button is disabled during parameter editing Menu Soft Keys Soft keys have two functions 1 Selects output function shape or operating mode 2 Selects parameter to be audited These buttons are disabled during parameter editing Menu Back Backs up one menu position This button is disabled during parameter editing Cancel Local Has two functions 1 When in edit mode cancels edit operation and restore last value 2 When operating the 397 from a remote interface none of the front panel buttons are active The Local button moves control back from remote to front panel buttons Enter Man Trig Has two functions 1 When multiple parameters are displayed on the screen the cursor and the dial scroll through the parameters Pressing Enter selects the parameter for edit After the parameter has been modified the Enter button locks in the new variable and releases the buttons for other operations Functional Description 397 User Manual Rear Panel Connectors 10 11 12 2 When th
128. ctivate the filter s 4 Activating burst mode when the 397 is set to sequence mode or 5 65 397 User Manual 5 66 activating sequence mode when the 397 is set to burst mode Corrective action Remove the 397 from burst or sequence and then selected the desired mode 5 Changing operating mode from triggered to continuous when the 397 is set to single sequence advance or changing the operating mode from continuous to triggered when the 397 is set to automatic sequence advance mode Corrective action Observe the 397 advance mode while setting sequence advance 222 Data out of range Parameter data which followed a specific header could not be used because its value is outside the valid range defined by the generator 224 lllegal parameter value A discrete parameter was received which was not a valid choice for the command An invalid parameter choice may have been used 300 Device specific error This is the generic device dependent error for the instrument when it cannot detect more specific errors A device specific error as defined in IEEE 488 2 has occurred 311 Memory error Indicates that an error was detected in the instrument s memory For example if memory size exceeds the minimum or maximum allowable memory size limits 350 Queue Overflow The error queue is full because more than 30 errors have occurred No additional errors are stored until the errors from the queue are removed The error qu
129. ctor is used when connecting master to slave units The master slave cable is supplied with your instrument The master slave mode must be activated from the front panel otherwise this connector and the cable attached to it will have no affect on normal operation of the 397 LAN USB GPIB AC LINE AC FUSE Run Modes Getting Started 1 Functional Description This RG45 connector accepts standard Ethernet cable Correct setting of the IP address is required to avoid conflicts with other instruments or equipment on the network Information how to change IP address and load instrument drivers to the computer is provided in the Installation chapter of this manual This connector accepts standard USB cable The connection to the host computer is automatic and does not require any address setting from within the 397 The first time the 397 is connected to the computer it will request the driver file This file is located on the CD which is supplied with the instrument Information how to load the driver is provided in the Installation chapter of this manual This 24 pin connector accepts standard GPIB cable The GPIB address is configured using the front panel utility menu The 397 conforms to the IEEE 488 2 standard Programming protocol is SCPI version 1993 0 GPIB cables are available separately from your Fluke dealer This 3 prong AC LINE connector accepts ac line voltage The 397 senses the line voltage and sets the appropriate
130. d by the test Waveform Sine wave Test Procedure 1 Perform Sine wave distortion tests on both channels using Table 6 6 Table 6 7 Front Panel Sine wave Distortions Test Distortion Reading 397 Setting SCLK Reading Limits 10 00Hz 40kS s lt 0 1 1000Hz 400KS s_ lt 01 IT 1 000kHz AMS S 0 196 10 00kHz 40Ms s 0 196 100 00kHz 100Ms s lt 0 1 2 Remove the cables from the front panel outputs and connect one cable to the rear panel SINE OUT connector 3 Perform sine wave distortion tests using Table 6 7 Table 6 8 Rear Panel Sine wave Distortions Test Distortion DATAN SCLK Setting Reading Limits Rear Panel Rear Panel Sine Out Out 10 00Hz 108 s lt 0 05 IS A 100S s 0 0596 1 000kHz 1kS s 0 0596 10 00kHz 10kS s 0 0596 100 0kHz 100kS s 0 0596 6 10 Maintenance and Performance Checks Sine Wave Characteristics Sine wave Spectral Equipment Spectrum Analyzer Purity Preparation 1 Connect 397 Channel 1 2 outputs to the spectrum analyzer input Use 500 and 20dB feedthrough termination at the spectrum analyzer input 2 Configure the 397 channels 1 2 as follows Reset Frequency As required by the test Waveform Sine wave Amplitude 5V Output On Test Procedure 1 Perform front panel sine wave spectral purity tests using Table 6 8 Table 6 9 Front Panel Sine wave Spectral Purity Test Spectrum Analyzer Reading Limits Start Sto
131. d click on the Memory Partition A dialog box as shown in Figure 4 6 will pop up 4 13 397 User Manual Memory Partition Table x Segm No Segment Size Append 1 1000 Insert 2 2000 3 436 Delte 4 24 Clear All r Data Cancel Figure 4 6 The Memory Partition Table The two main fields in the segment table are Segment number and segment size The Seg No segment number is an index field that can has values only from 1 to 2048 The Segment Size is always associated with the segment number You can program any segment size from 16 to 4M Use the Append key to add a segment at the end of the segment list If you highlighted a segment the Append key turns automatically to insert Use the Insert key to insert a segment at the cursor location The Delete key is used for deleting a segment at the cursor position The Clear All key will remove all segments from the table and will let you start designing your segment table from fresh Click on the Close to discard of the contents of the dialog box without saving your last actions and to remove the Segment Table from the screen The Save key saves the current session so you can start the Memory Partition table from the same point after you close this session The Download key updates the 397 with the present segment table settings Y TIP The Memory Partition table does not download waveform Use the memory partition table only if you merged a
132. d frequency amplitude and offset setting In triggered mode the 397 circuits are armed to generate one output waveform The trigger circuit is sensitive to transitions at the trigger input Select between positive or negative transitions to trigger the instrument When triggered the generator outputs one waveform cycle and remains idle at the last point of the waveform The instrument can be armed to receive a trigger signal from either the front panel connector remote command or from an internal free running trigger generator The period of the internal trigger generator is programmable with 7 digits The trigger signal whether it comes from the front panel or from a remote command has to pass through some electrical circuits These circuits cause some small delay known as system delay System delay cannot be eliminated completely and must be considered when applying a trigger signal It defines how long it will take from a valid trigger edge to the moment that the output reacts In gated mode the 397 circuits are armed to generate output waveforms as long as a gating signal is present Unlike the triggered mode the gated mode is level sensitive When the gating signal goes low the waveform at the output connector is first completed and the output reverts to an idle state The idle amplitude level after the gating signal goes low is the last point on the waveform The burst mode is an extension of the triggered mode where the gen
133. d link is continuous or stepped Information on the Mixed sequence advance mode is given later 0 flags continuous 1 flags stepped Assuming that you already downloaded waveforms created and downloaded sequence table you can proceed now with the following description how to set the 397 to output sequenced waveforms Refer to Figure 3 19 and use the following description to learn how to output sequenced waveforms and how to program sequence parameters To select Sequenced waveforms as the output waveform type press Waveforms then Sequenced The screen as shown in Figure 3 19 will display and the output will already generate arbitrary waveforms Note the channel you are currently program and make sure the icon at the upper right corner agrees with your required programming sequence 3 27 397 User Manual 3 28 e La MENU 397 WAVEFORM GENERATOR ET Advance Mode o9 Advance Source a 0 ONS s ipp Clock de E ass Lol MAN MENU LOCAL MANTNG 7 BASE MODE TRIGGERED EXT FUNC TYPE BIT 11 START Pt o RUN De POSITION o SLOPE POSITIVE A Figure 3 19 Sequence Parameters Use the following procedure to modify the parameters that are associated with the Sequenced waveforms function 1 Press the soft key next to the required parameter to display the edit field 2 Punch in the value using the numeric keypad Be careful not to exceed parameter limits while you key the numbers 3 Selec
134. default The 397 will return FIX USER or SEQ depending on the present 397 setting Default value is FIX 5 27 397 User Manual FUNCtion SHAPe SINusoid TRlangle SQUare PULSe RAMP SINC EXPonential GAUSsian NOISe DC Purpose This command defines the shape of waveform that will be available at the output connector This command has no affect if present 397 setting is USER or SEQ lt SINusoid gt selects sine waveform lt TRlangle gt selects triangular waveform lt SQUare gt selects square waveform lt PULSe gt selects pulse waveform lt RAMP gt selects ramp waveform lt SINC gt selects sinc waveform lt EXPonential gt selects exponential waveform lt GAUSsian selects gaussian waveform lt NOISe gt selects random noise waveform DC selects dc waveform Parameter type Discrete FUNCtion SHAPe Response and default The 397 will return SIN TRI SQU PULS RAMP SINC EXP GAUS NOIS or DC depending on the present 397 setting Default value is SIN ROSCillator SOURce INTernal EXTernal Purpose This command will select the reference source for the sample clock generator lt INTernal gt selects an internal source The internal source could be either the standard 100 ppm oscillator or the optional 1 ppm TCXO lt EXTernal gt activates the external reference input An external reference must be connected to the 397 for it to continue normal operation Parameter type Discrete ROSCillator SOURce Response
135. dering irons Once the device is installed on the PC board the device is adequately protected and normal handling may resume The Model 397 should be cleaned as often as operating conditions require To clean the instrument use the following procedure 1 Thoroughly clean the inside and outside of the instrument 2 When cleaning inaccessible areas remove dust with low pressure compressed air or a vacuum cleaner 3 Use alcohol applied with a cleaning brush to remove accumulation of dirt or grease from connector contacts and component terminals 4 Clean the exterior of the instrument and the front panel with a mild detergent mixed with water applying the solution with a soft lint free cloth Maintenance and Performance Checks Repair and Replacement Repair and Repair and replacement of electrical and mechanical parts must be accomplished with great care Printed circuit boards can become Replacement warped cracked or burnt from excessive heat or mechanical stress The following repair techniques are suggested to avoid inadvertent destruction or degradation of parts and assemblies 1 Use a 60 40 solder and temperature controlled 35 40 watt pencil type soldering iron on the circuit board The tip of the iron should be clean and properly tinned for best heat transfer to the solder joint A higher wattage soldering iron may separate the circuit from the base material 2 Keep the soldering iron in contact with the PC board
136. ding summary messages in the Standard Event Status Register Thus the application programmer can select reasons for the generator to issue an ESB summary message bit by altering the contents of the ESE Register The Standard Event Status Enable Register is read with the ESE Common query The response to this query is a number that represents the sum of the binary weighted value of the Standard Event Status Enable Register The Standard Event Status Enable Register is written using the ESE command followed by a decimal value representing the bit values of the Register A bit value one indicates an enabled condition Consequently a bit value of zero indicates a disabled condition The Standard Event Status Enable Register is cleared by setting ESEO Summary of ESE messages is given in the following ESEO No mask Clears all bits in the register ESE1 ESB on Operation Complete ESE2 ESB on Request Control ESE4 ESB on Query Error ESE8 ESB on Device Dependent Error ESE16 ESB on Execution Error ESE32 ESB on Command Error ESE64 ESB on User Request ESE128 ESB Power on In general whenever the 397 receives an invalid SCPI command it automatically generates an error Errors are stored in a special error queue and may be retrieved from this buffer one at a time Errors are retrieved in first in first out FIFO order The first error returned is the first error that was stored When you ha
137. e 397 can sweep linearly from minimum to its maximum frequency whereas similar instruments that use the standard VCO design can sweep through 3 decades only The 397 has the following modulation options FM FSK Ramped FSK Sweep and AM These functions are described below Modulated waveforms are selected from the waveforms menu Figure 3 22 shows how to select the FM To access this menu press TOP then waveforms and select the Modulated waveforms option Modulation type is selected from the Modulation Type menu Refer to Figure 3 22 and use the following procedure to select the modulation type MENU e sento FM Modulation Using the Instrument Generating Modulated Waveforms 1 Press on the Modulation Type soft key The following options will display AM FM FSK and Sweep 2 Using the dial or the up and down arrow keypad scroll down to the desired option 3 Press Enter to lock in the selected modulation type The output will be updated immediately after you press the Enter button FLUKE 397 WAVEFORM GENERATOR Pr cia l t sync 1 2 3 ME Vd COCOCOGS v FSK Swee Sg ONCE TYPE BIT 12 POSITION o Figure 3 22 Selecting a modulated Waveform 3 Frequency modulation is the most common modulation scheme used in telecommunications In this mode the sample clock frequency is modulated and placed at the rear panel sine output FM modulation is also available from the front panel outputs exce
138. e 397 is placed in Triggered run mode the Man Trig button can be used to manually trigger the 397 Cursor UP Down Left and Right Has two functions 1 When multiple parameters are displayed on the screen the cursor and the dial scroll through the parameters 2 When parameter is selected for editing cursor buttons right or left move the cursor accordingly Cursor buttons up or down modify parameter value accordingly Dial Has similar functionality as the cursor UP and Down keys Numeral keypad These keys are used for modifying an edited parameter value Parameter Suffixes M k x1 and m These keys are used to place suffix at the end of the parameter They are also used for terminating an edit operation Program CH1 CH2 Use Program CH1 to modify the screen to display channel 1 parameters Use Program CH2 to modify the screen to display channel 2 parameters These keys can be used only when the 397 is not in edit mode ON OFF Output Sync These keys can be used only when the 397 is not in edit mode The Output ON OFF toggles output waveform at the output connector ON and OFF The Sync ON OFF toggles the sync waveform at the SYNC output connector ON and OFF The 397 has a number of connectors on its rear panel These connectors are described below Figure 1 6 shows rear panel plugs indicators connectors and other parts Getting Started 1 Functional Description
139. e 4 4 is accessible after you click on the STD button in the Panels bar The functional groups in the Standard Waveforms Panel are described below The Waveforms group provides access to a library of built in standard waveforms The library includes Sine Triangle Square Pulse Ramp Sinc Exponential Gaussian and DC waveforms Each waveform has one or more parameters that can be adjusted for the required characteristics of the output For example phase start can be adjusted for the sine and triangle waveforms and duty cycle can be adjusted for the square waveform The pulse waveform can be adjusted for rise and fall time as well as width and delay Parameters that are associated with each waveform are automatically displayed when the waveform is selected Note that by clicking a button in this group you are immediately updating the 397 output with this waveform shape Frequency Figure 4 4 The Standard Waveforms Panel Frequency The Frequency control lets you program the output frequency of the selected waveform shape The frequency parameter may be modified when the LED illuminates You can use the dial keyboard or the 1 HA keys to adjust the readout to the required setting After you modify the reading press Execute to update the 397 with the new reading The Arbitrary amp Sequence Panel Parameters ArbExplorer The Control Panels Nj Note Normal color of the digital reading is dark blue If you modify the
140. e AM screen is shown in Figure 3 27 To access this menu press Waveforms and from the Modulated waveforms screen select the AM type Modulation will start as soon as you apply your modulating signal to the rear panel AM IN connector Note that AM has no effect on the SINE OUT signal Using the Instrument 3 Adjusting Phase Offset Between Channels BRSE MODE SYNC OUT ARM COFFI FUNC MOD TYPE BIT BREAKPOINT 1 RUN CONT POSITION O SLOPE POSITIVE Figure 3 27 AM Parameters Adjusting Phase The 397 has two output channels that can generate various and numerous waveforms Although the control over waveform Offset Between parameters is separate for each channel the sample clock is Channels derived from a single source Having a single source for both channels is of great advantage because of two main reasons 1 There is no jitter between the two channels and 2 If we ignore the initial skew both waveforms start at exactly the same phase Understanding the initial skew term is very important If you set both channels to output square waveforms and then connect these signals to an oscilloscope If you then set the oscilloscope to its fastest time base setting you ll see the two rising edges of the 397 signals They do not overlap because the instrument has a skew spec of 2 ns Skew is caused as a result of many factors Although the two channels were designed exactly the same small variations in printed circuit board layout or compo
141. e arbitrary block data binary block Represents segment table data The segment table data is made of 48 bit words however the GPIB link has 8 data bas lines and accepts 8 bit words only Therefore the data has to be prepared as 48 bit words and rearranged as six 8 bit words before it can be used by the 397 as segment table data There are a number of points you should be aware of before you start preparing the data 1 Each channel has its own segment table buffer Therefore make sure you selected the correct active channel with the INST SEL command before you download segment table data to the generator 2 Minimum number of segments is 1 maximum number of segments is 2048 3 Maximum segment size depends on segment size With the basic 397 you can program maximum 4M in one segment 4 Segment table data has 64 bit values of which 32 bits are used for start address and 32 bits are used for segment size Therefore Data for each segment must have 8 bytes 5 The number of bytes in a complete segment table must divide by 8 The Model 397 has no control over data sent to its segment table during data transfer Therefore wrong data and or incorrect number of bytes will cause erroneous memory partition 6 First segment address starts at 256 decimal or 0x100 in hex 7 Compute the start address for segment n using the following equation ADD ADD 4 SIZE 4 4 For example say you have two segments the first is 10 000 points T
142. e arranged in the same order as you connected the synchronizing cables Make sure that the last slave has the special termination connector attached to the cable When you finally have your list arranged in the right order you can apply the setting to all instruments by pressing the Apply button You can also activate and deactivate the synchronization from this dialog box by pressing the Activate and Deactivate buttons These buttons are duplicates of the Utility buttons so you do not have to go back and forth between panels Phase offset between instruments is programmed in the Phase Ofst field for each instrument in the chain X Ch The X Ch group provides access to inter channel offset adjustment Offset is programmed in units of waveform points and therefore it is best utilized in arbitrary mode where the number of waveform points is known When offset is set to 0 the two channels will start at the same time and with the first transition exactly in the same phase The start phase of channel 2 can be programmed to have a different start position so phase between the channels will be proportional to the programmed start position of the second channel TO change the phase offset point and click on the Offset LED the value that is associated with Offset is displayed on the digital display You can use the dial keyboard or the 1 H keys to adjust the readout to the required setting After you modify the reading press Execute to update the
143. e is shown in the Waveform Shape window The Segment Table has four fields The Seg field contains numbers from 1 through 2048 designating the programmed memory segment Note that memory segments are numbered from 1 to 2048 The State field shows the current status of the memory segment It can be Free if no file has yet been assigned to this segment number or Mapped if file name has been assigned to the segment but the Download button has not been used yet to move the file to the 397 memory or Loaded if the process has been completed by pressing either the Download button or the All download all button The File field is an edit field that lets you browse and select file names to be applied to a specific memory segment To change or add file name point and click on the File name field and either type your path or browse to the file location and let Windows find the right path The Length field displays the length of the selected memory segment Memory segments size may be programmed from 16 to 4M Note that the length field is not accessible and shown for reference purpose only 4 15 397 User Manual 4 16 Waveform Studio Channel 1 gt x gt Segment table State Sequence table Link Seg Loops Adv Loaded Loaded Mapped Loaded Free i C Program Files Fluke Wave_1 way 1000 set C Program Files Fluke Wave_2 way 240 Delete C Program Files Fluke Wave_3 way 240 Delete
144. e of your equation will always look as Amplitude p where p is the equation variables in units of waveform points You can write equations with up to 256 characters If the equation is too long to fit in the visible field parts to the left or right will scroll off the ends Equation The following paragraphs describe the conventions that are used Conventions for writing an equation To avoid errors it is extremely important that you make yourself familiar with these conventions before you plan your waveforms Equations are written in conventional mathematical notation You may only enter the right part of the equation The only limitation is that the equation must be of a single variable that is directly related to the current horizontal axis setting Case is not important and spaces are ignored Numbers are entered in scientific notation All calculations are done with double digit precision For the trigonometric functions all angles are expressed in radians A number of constants are provided e which is the base of the natural logarithm pi which is the circumference of a unit diameter circle per which equals the programmed horizontal range f which equals 1 per omg which equals 2 pi per and numerals in the range of 1E 20 to 1E 20 There are three classes of precedence raise to power has the highest precedence multiply and divide come second and have the lowest precedence Parentheses may be used to ch
145. e present on power cables connector jacks or test fixtures The American National Standard Institute ANSI states that a shock hazard exists when voltage levels greater than 30V RMS 42 4V peak or 60 VDC are present A WARNING For maximum safety do not touch the product test cables or any other instrument parts while power is applied to the circuit under test ALWAYS remove power from the entire test system before connecting cables or jumpers installing or removing cards from the computer or making internal changes such as changing the module address Do not touch any object that could provide a current path to the common side of the circuit under test or power line earth ground Always keep your hands dry while handling the instrument 2 3 397 User Manual Performance Checks Power Requirements Grounding Requirements dul When using test fixtures keep the lid closed while power is applied to the device under test Carefully read the Safety Precautions instructions that are supplied with your test fixtures Before performing any maintenance disconnect the line cord and all test cables Only qualified service personnel should perform maintenance The instrument has been inspected for mechanical and electrical performance before shipment from the factory It is free of physical defects and in perfect electrical order Check the instrument for damage in transit and perform the electrical procedures outlined in
146. e required parameter turns on The value that is associated with the lit LED is displayed on the digital display You can use the dial keyboard or the 1 HA keys to adjust the readout to the required setting After you modify the reading press Execute to update the 397 with the new reading Nj Note Normal color of the digital reading is dark blue If you modify the reading the color changes to a lighter shade of blue indicating that the 397 has not been updated yet with the new parameter Pressing Execute will update the instrument and will restore the color of the digital readout to dark blue indicating that the displayed value is the same as the generator setting 397 User Manual Also note that the digital readout has an autodetect mechanism for the high and low limits You cannot exceed the limits if you are using the dial but only if you use the keypad In case you do the program will not let you download an illegal parameter and you ll be requested to correct your setting sample Clock d Figure 4 5 The Arbitrary amp Sequence Panel Sample Clock The Sample Clock group is comprised of parameters that control Sequence Advance the sample clock frequency The sample clock setting affects the 397 in arbitrary mode only Note there is only one sample clock source inside the instrument however in some case where 2 different sample clock settings are required for each channel the sample clock can be divided by an
147. e start frequency will be set to 100Hz Waveforms and the stop frequency to 25kHz We ll be using linear sweep in the down direction in 10ms We ll monitor the sweep modulation from the front panel outputs then compare the results to the rear panel sine output connector 1 Select a standard waveform from the standard waveforms and 3 45 397 User Manual 3 46 press the Frequency button Modify the frequency setting to display 1 000000MHz Observe and note that the SCLK parameter is showing 102 4000KS s In standard waveform mode the SCLK parameter is set automatically by the instrument and can not be modified directly The information that we need from this display is the SCLK value and the number of points used for generating the current waveform In this case the number of points is computed from the relationship N SCLK Freq 102 4kS s 100Hz 1024 points 2 Now it is time to check if the number of points will not conflict at the stop frequency We can check this by dividing the maximum possible sample frequency by the number of points from the above calculations Fstop max 100MS s 1024Pts 97 65625kHz In this case we should be safe because we plan to sweep to 25kHz only 3 Now we have to compute the sample clock frequency at the stop point Knowing already the number of points we have in this waveform the sample frequency at the stop point is computed using the following equation Fstop 1024Pts x 25kHz 2
148. e sync pulse The SYNC width is programmable per channel lt width gt will set the SYNC width Parameter type Numeric integer only Parameter range lt width gt 4 to 100000 in units of waveform points The width cannot exceed the segment size setting OUTPut SYNC WIDTh Response and default The 397 will return the present SYNC width value Default value is 4 5 39 397 User Manual INSTrument A dual channel arbitrary waveform generator is considered as two Sub logical instruments The INSTrument subsystem provides a u system mechanism to identify and select instrument channels Factory defaults after RST are shown in bold typeface Parameter low and high limits are given where applicable Keyword Parameter Form Default Low Limit High Limit INSTrument 1 2 1 COUPle 7 OFF ON 0 1 OFF MODE MASTer SLAVe MASTer PHASe phase 0 0 4M INSTrument 1 2 Purpose This command will set the active channel for future programming sequences Subsequent commands affect the selected channel only e 1will set channel 1 active 2will set channel 2 active Parameter type Discrete INSTrument Response and default The 397 will return 1 or 2 depending on the present active channel setting Default value is 1 INSTrument COUPle OFF ON 0 1 Purpose This command will enable daisy chained instruments to operate in multi instrument synchronization mode Observe the following pre requisite conditi
149. e the results to the rear panel sine output connector Before we start with our 397 setting we must know the length of the arbitrary segment that we ll use To simplify matters let s download a 100 waveform points triangular waveform to the segment 1 You can use ArbExplorer for this purpose Information how to create and download waveforms to the arbitrary memory is given in Chapter 4 We want the start frequency to be 100Hz Bearing in mind that the output frequency is equal to the sample clock frequency divided by the number of points the start sample clock must be programmed to be 10kS s 10k 100 100Hz 1 Press TOP soft key and press the following soft keys sequence Waveforms gt gt Modulated gt gt Modulation Type Sweep Make sure the Carrier shows Arb If the carrier waveform is showing Std backup to the Top menu and select the Arbitrary waveform option 2 Press Start Sample CIk soft key and program the value to 10ks s Press Enter to lock in the new value 3 Now it is time to check if the number of points will not conflict at the stop frequency We can check this by dividing the maximum possible sample frequency by the number of points from the above calculations Fstop max 100MS s 100Pts 1MHz In this case we should be safe because we plan to sweep to 25kHz only 4 Now we have to compute the sample clock frequency at the stop point Knowing already the number of points we have in this waveform the sample cl
150. econds Marker This defines a sample clock frequency of which when transitioned through will output a marker pulse at the SYNC output connector The default position of the marker is the sweep start frequency Modulation Run Mode Defines the run mode for the swept waveform only Note that run modes are not the same for modulated and non modulated waveforms The difference is as follows When the 397 generates Standard Arbitrary or Sequenced waveforms and removed from continuous run mode the output idles on a dc level until a valid trigger initiates an output cycle On the other hand when the 397 generates a modulated waveform modulation is generated continuously when the generator is placed in Continuous run mode however when placed in trigger burst or gate run modes the output generates continuous carrier waveform until a valid trigger signal is received If only one trigger is issued the 397 generates a single modulation cycle and resumes to output continuous carrier waveform only Y Tip Use the arrow keys or the dial to scroll through the Sweep parameters The Modulation Type option will remain at the top while the others may be accessed selectively Two examples are given in the following paragraphs to show you how to sweep using standard waveforms and how to sweep arbitrary waveforms Example 1 Generating This example will show how to generate sweep modulation using Sweep Using Standard the standard waveforms Th
151. ecting a Remote interface oooniococninnnnnnnnniiannir cecinit ntt dnas 8 2 2 2 GPIB Configuration CIN ea ene e ee teo reae 9 2 2 3 USB Device Detected AAA 9 2 2 4 Found New Hardware Wizard eene rne nen 10 2 2 5 Choose Your Search and installation Options ooooooooononnconoconoconcnnn nono nonononononononnnnnnnnos 11 2 2 6 New Hardware Found and Software metalle 11 2 2 7 Found New Hardware USB Serial Port 12 2 2 8 Choose Your Search and installation Options ooooooooooooncconoconoconcnnn nono nononononononononnnnnnos 12 2 2 9 New Hardware Found and Software metalle 13 2 2 10 Model 397 Configured for USB Operation eese 14 2 2 11 LAN Configuration SCI een eiie i e Mete tte te RE REM e Reus Ea an DE Hte Lad uan eh AEN 15 2 3 1 Reset 397 to Factory Detalla ito a rta ll 3 4 3 2 397 Front Panel Operation 3 6 3 3 Enabling and Disabling the Outputs certe Seeche dee aonb dues 3 8 3 4 Selecting an Output Waveform Type ccccccceceeeecenesseceeeeeeeeeenesseneeeeenseeeeeneebeccaeeneaenees 3 9 List of Figures continued 3 5 Modifying Output Frequericy ice io e Enel diia 3 11 3 6 Modifying Sample Clock Frequency oooocccocococonnccnonoccnononnnnnnnnaneconcnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnccnnnn nnn nnns 3 12 3 7 Programming Sample Clock Frequency Divider ooooooccccccccccccooocccoccncncccnonananan cnn nnncnnnnnnnnns 3 13 3 8 Programming Amplitude and Offset 3 15 3 9 Run Mode
152. ection NONE This will eliminate confusing setting conflicts Modification of the filter state and range is done from the Outputs menu To access this menu select the Outputs screen as shown in Figure 3 3 and modify the parameters as shown in Figure 3 14 In cases where synchronization to other instruments in a system is needed you have two options Use an external clock source for the 10MHz reference clock or replace the internal sample clock generator entirely with an external clock source Either way this is a major twist in the 397 basic operation because if for any reason you leave one or both source options on external and do not apply the necessary signal to the input the operation of the generator will be impeded without visual references that something is wrong The SCLK and the 10MHz reference source menu were placed in the System menu as shown in Figure 3 15 Change these settings only if you are absolutely sure that another reference source is available at the appropriate inputs 3 21 397 User Manual Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 3 22 Settings Brightness Level Dial Direction Forward The SCLK input is located on the rear panel Use this input to replace the internal sample clock generator The external sample clock input accepts ECL level signals terminated to 2V into 500 The 10MHz reference input is also located on the rear panel It accepts TTL level signals only Note that the 397 internal referen
153. ection so the output sweeps from stop frequency to start frequency 3 43 397 User Manual 3 44 Start Sample CIk This is the frequency of the sample clock as displayed in the standard waveform screens Note that SCLK value is shown in gray and will automatically change when you set up frequency of the standard waveform There is no direct access to SCLK setting when you program standard waveform frequency The SINE OUT connector at the rear panel generates sine waves only This output is derived from the sample clock generator and therefore its output is directly proportional to the SCLK setting There are differences how you set up sweep operation for standard and arbitrary waveforms These are explained and examples given in the following paragraphs Stop Sample Clik This parameter specifies where the sweep will stop Note that sweep stop does not necessarily have to have lower value than the sweep stop frequency If you define sweep stop frequency higher than the sweep start frequency then the generator will sweep up You can also reverse the direction of the sweep by using the sweep direction parameter Y Tips 1 In standard waveform mode the SCLK parameter and the number of waveform points are set automatically by the instrument and can not be modified directly During sweep modulation only the sample clock is changing but the number of waveform points remain constant Therefore computing the number of waveform poin
154. ed later to compute the deviation range parameter We are now ready to proceed with programming the FM parameters Continue with the following procedure 1 Press TOP soft key and press the following soft keys sequence Waveforms gt gt Modulated gt gt Modulation Type FM 2 Press Modulation Shape and select the Arbitrary option 3 Select the FM Sample Clock parameter and program it to 1MS s This sample clock frequency value will be needed for the following steps to calculate the frequency of the modulating waveform This will be done from ArbExplorer Information how to use ArbExplorer is given in Chapter 4 4 Invoke ArbExplorer and press the FM composer The FM Composer screen is shown in Figure 3 24 Modify the Wavelength field to have 10 000 points and press the Wavelength button The number of points is derived from the following relationship N FM Sample Clock 100Hz 1M 100 10 000 5 Now you have to program the deviation range At the beginning of this example we computed and showed that the 397 is using 32 points to generate this waveform Note that the deviation range is given on sample per second and use the following relationship to compute the number for the deviation range Deviation Range 100kHz x 32 3 2MS After you complete updating the above field the FM Composer will have the following coordinates The Y axis shows the frequency deviation range The center line shows 64MS and the high and low limits are
155. eforms are generated from digital data points which are stored in memory Each data point has a vertical resolution of 14 bits 16384 points i e each sample is placed on the vertical axis with a precision of 1 16384 The Model 397 has the following waveform memory capacity 4 Meg standard memory configuration Each horizontal point has a unique address the first being 00000 and the last depends on the memory option In cases where smaller waveform lengths are required the waveform memory can be divided into smaller segments When the instrument is programmed to output arbitrary waveforms the clock samples the data points one at a time from address 0 to the last address The rate at which each sample is replayed is defined by the sample clock rate parameter The 397 provides programmable sample clock rates from 100mS s to 125MS s Unlike the built in standard waveforms arbitrary waveforms must first be loaded into the instrument s memory Correct memory management is required for best utilization of the arbitrary memory An explanation of how to manage the arbitrary waveform memory is given in the following paragraphs Arbitrary memory Management The arbitrary memory in comprised of a finite length of words The maximum size arbitrary waveform that can be loaded into memory is 4M Waveforms are created using small sections of the arbitrary memory The memory can be partitioned into smaller segments up to 4096 and different waveforms
156. egment the loop counter is executed automatically Note although the trigger input controls advanced steps to use this mode the 397 must be in continuous operating mode Single Using this advance mode the 397 idles between steps until a valid trigger signal is sensed The single advance mode requires that the 397 be in trigger operating mode only An attempt to select the Single advance mode when the instrument is in continuous operating mode can not be done When triggered the generator outputs one waveform cycle Then the output level idles at a DC level equal to the last point of the last generated waveform If loops were programmed the output will repeat this segment for n times automatically Only after executing all of the programmed loops will the sequence step to the next assigned link Note to use this mode the 397 must be in triggered operating mode Mixed This sequence advance mode allows combination of automatic and stepped links in one sequence table To use this mode in the sequence table mark the Adv field 1 to flag stepped link or 0 for continuous link Then download the sequence table to the 397 Note to use this mode the 397 must be in continuous operating mode Step with a 0 bit assigned to a step it will advance automatically to the next step If 1 is assigned to a step the instrument will generate this step and its associated number of repeats then will wait for the next trigger to adv
157. eiieiiittt tittet ttnn n nnen n EEE EEEA EEEa Eat tttnEnEnEnnnnn 3 24 Generating Sequenced WaveformS cociococcocircncrnccrcnrnncrncnrrenrncnrenrnrnne nan nannnndananen s 3 26 What Are Sequenced Wavetormms 3 27 Editing the Sequence Table oocococccccccocnccncnnccononnnnaconononnnononononaneconenonecinnas 3 29 Selecting Sequence Advance Modes seen nnns 3 30 3 1 397 User Manual Generating Modulated Waveforms eene ener nnn nnn 3 32 FM Modulatton nennen nnne nnn hnn nnne sss n nne ennnen EEEn 3 33 Example 1 Modulating Standard Waveforms Using the Standard FM Mode 3 35 Example 2 Modulating Standard Waveforms Using the Arbitrary FM Mode 3 36 Example 3 Modulating Arbitrary waveforms Using the Arbitrary FM Mode 3 39 c fec 3 39 Example 1 FSK Using Standard Waveforms sesssssesssssss 3 41 Example 2 FSK Using Arbitrary VWavetorms A 3 42 NJ lE 3 43 Example 1 Generating Sweep Using Standard Waveforms 3 45 Example 2 Generating Sweep Using Arbitrary Waveforms 3 47 AM Lo ek M AME Ka dL a c d 3 48 Adjusting Phase Offset Between Channels ssssseessserrrrsesserssrirrrrrsserusrrrrrrrnnreesernne 3 49 Synchronizing Multiple Instruments AAA 3 51 3 2 Overview Inter Channel Dependency Output Termination Input Output Protection Power
158. element different than allowed 108 Parameter not allowed More parameters were received than expected for the header 109 Missing parameter Too few parameters were received for the command One or more parameters that were required for the command were omitted 128 Numeric data not allowed A legal numeric data element was received but the instrument does not accept one in this position 131 Invalid suffix A suffix was incorrectly specified for a numeric parameter The suffix may have been misspelled 148 Character data not allowed A character data element was encountered where prohibited by the instrument 200 Execution error This is the generic syntax error for the instrument when it cannot detect more specific errors Execution error as defined in IEEE 488 2 has occurred 221 Setting conflict Two conflicting parameters were received which cannot be executed without generating an error Listed below are events causing setting conflicts 1 Sum of pulse or ramp parameters is more than 100 Corrective action Change parameters to correct the problem 2 ampl 2 offset is more than 5 Corrective action Reduce offset to 0 then change amplitude offset values to correct the problem 3 Activating filters when the 397 is set to output the built in sine waveform or activating the built in sine waveform when one of the 397 filters is turned on Corrective action If in sine select another function and a
159. enly divisible by four only For example 2096 bytes is an acceptable length for a binary block 2002 is not a multiple of 4 therefore the generator will generate an error message if this segment length is used TRACe DELete segment number Purpose This command will delete a segment The memory space that is being freed will be available for new waveforms as long as the new waveform will be equal or smaller in size to the deleted segment If the deleted segment is the last segment then the size of another waveform written to the same segment is not limited For example let consider two segments the first being a 1000 point waveform and the second with 100 points If you delete segment 1 you can reprogram another waveform to segment 1 with 5 50 Remote Programming Reference TRACe Subsystem size to 1000 points If you reprogram segment 1 with 1004 points the instrument will generate an error and will not accept this waveform On the other hand if you delete segment 2 which was the last segment you programmed then you can reprogram this segment with waveforms having length limited only by the size of the entire memory space e segment number will select the segment number that will be deleted TRACe DELete ALL Purpose This command will delete all segments and will clear the entire waveform memory This command is particularly important in case you want to de fragment the entire waveform memory and start building your waveform segm
160. ent ees 2 5 Preparation tor SG ERI eee da 2 5 Installation 2 5 Installing Software E EE 2 6 Controlling the Instrument from Remote eeeeeecsneeneceee nennen enint nnn 2 6 Connecting to a Remote interface eeeeiseeeeeesesseee cese eene nnnm nnn 2 6 Selecting a Remote interface a eceseeiseeeneeeenn niente nean inni reb nnns 2 7 islas tp tomas 2 8 E NEN TE OO 2 9 CAN Configuratio m PER 2 14 Choosing a Static IP Address coccion 2 14 Contents continued Using the Instrument eegenarteg rr ti aeon raano oda da gege 3 1 GUI IN 3 3 Inter Channel Dependency oie oet eto qe aire ege 3 3 Output Termination acce eie e adds 3 3 Input Output Protection 3 3 Feeler 3 3 eoi 3 5 Enabling the Outputs cti ote tc t pt er aces rr ue dr ER er ER Rn EN LR ER CERE TR MEE na dn 3 8 Selecting a Waveform TP load ici beo eR PM eie didis eto ia IR RES 3 9 Changing the Output Freduerny sideris ertt tet o tot Ge seb e bem d eer 3 10 Changing the Sample Clock Frequency eekEKSSERSRRNEEEEEEEEREEEERRNEENEEEEEEREEEEEREEEEEEE NENNEN 3 11 Dividing the Sample Clock for Channel 2 eerie eran 3 12 Programming the Amplitude and Offset 3 13 Selecting eun MODO ao io acts edo satis 3 15 Triggered MOTO E
161. ents from scratch Y Tip The TRAC DEL ALL command does not re write the memory so whatever waveforms were downloaded to the memory are still there for recovery The TRAC DEL ALL command clears the segment table You can recover memory segments by using the TRAC DEF command You can also use this technique to resize or combine waveform segments TRACe SELect lt segment_number gt Purpose This command will select the active waveform segment for the output By selecting the active segment you are performing two function 1 Successive TRAC commands will affect the selected segment The SYNC output will be assigned to the selected segment This behavior is especially important for sequence operation where multiple segments form a large sequence In this case you can synchronize external devices exactly to the segment of interest segment number will set the active waveform segment number Parameter type Numeric integer only Parameter range segment number 1 to 2048 TRACe SELect Response The 397 will return the active segment number 5 51 397 User Manual SEGmentZ header binary block Purpose This command will divide the waveform memory to smaller segments and will speed up memory segmentation The idea is that waveform segments can be built as one long waveform and then just use this command to split the waveform to the appropriate memory segments In this way there is no need to define and download waveforms
162. ependently at a breakpoint uniquely programmed for each channel If breakpoint has not been programmed the waveform will stop after the last point Rear Panel Trigger Input BNC USB ENET or GPIB commands 1 Sample Clock 150ns Waveform dependent 9 digits limited by 1uHz Same as internal SCLK reference Same as internal SCLK reference 100uHz to 50MHz 5 to 10MHz 20 to 50MHz Start phase 0 to 360 100uHz to 12 5MHz usable above 12 5MHz Start phase 0 to 360 100uHz to 50MHz Duty cycle 1 to 99 10mHz to 12 5MHz usable above 12 5MHz 0 to 99 9 of period 0 to 99 9 of period 0 to 99 9 of period 0 to 99 9 of period Sinc Sine x x Frequency Range Adjustable Parameters Cycles Gaussian Pulse Frequency Range Adjustable Parameters Time Constant Exponential Decaying Rising Pulse Frequency Range Adjustable Parameters Time Constant DC Range ARBITRARY WAVEFORMS Waveform Memory Memory Segmentation Number of Segments Min Segment Size Memory Interleave Vertical Resolution Waveform Download Sine Wave Performance Description Sinewave Total Harmonic Distortion Harmonics and non related spurious below 10MHz Appendices Specifications 10 mHz to 12 5 MHz usable above 12 5 MHz 4 to 100 cycles 10 mHz to 12 5 MHz usable above 12 5 MHz 10 to 200 10 mHz to 12 5 MHz usable above 12 5 MHz 100 to 100 10096 to 10096 of amplitude 1 Meg points standard 4 Meg points optional 1 t
163. er outlet Do not use a two conductor extension cord or a three prong two prong adapter This will defeat the protective feature of the third conductor in the power cord Maintenance and calibration procedures sometimes call for operation of the unit with power applied and protective covers removed Read the procedures and heed warnings to avoid live circuits points Before operation this instrument 1 Ensure the instrument is configured to operate on the voltage at the power source See Installation Section 2 Ensure the proper fuse is in place for the power source to operate The fuse specifica tion Manufacturer Littelfuse Cat No 218500 T 250VAC 0 5A 3 Ensure all other devices connected to or in proximity to this instrument are properly grounded or connected to the protective third wire earth ground If the instrument fails to operate satisfactorily shows visible damage has been stored under unfavorable conditions has sustained stress Do not operate until performance is checked by qualified personnel Chapter Getting Started What s in This Chapter Introduction ssssssseenseeesreerreernee 397 Feature Highlights ArbExplorer Feature Highlights Description Safety Consideratons Supplied Accessories Specifications Functional Description Front Panel Connectors
164. erarchical structure also known as the tree system Square brackets are used to enclose a keyword that is optional when programming the command that is the 397 will process the command to have the same effect whether the optional node is omitted by the programmer or not Letter case in tables is used to differentiate between the accepted short form upper case and the long form upper and lower case The PARAMETER FORM column indicates the number and order of parameter in a command and their legal value Parameter types are distinguished by enclosing the type in angle brackets gt If parameter form is enclosed by square brackets these are then optional care must be taken to ensure that optional parameters are consistent with the intention of the associated keywords The vertical bar can be read as or and is used to separate alternative parameter options 5 7 397 User Manual Table 5 1 Model 397 SCPI Commands List Summary Keyword Parameter Form Default in Bold Notes INSTRument SELect 112 COUPle STATe OFF ON MODE MASTer SLAVe PHASe OFFSet 0 0 4M 4 point increments OUTPut STATe OFF ON FILTer LPASs NONE 25M 50M ALL SYNC STATe OFF ON SOURce BIT LCOMplete POSition POINt 0 0 4M 4 point increments WIDTh 4 4 100000 4 point increments SOURce A
165. erator can be programmed to output a pre determined number of waveforms The source to trigger the burst can be selected from a front panel connector GPIB trigger or from the built in trigger generator Using the latest DDS direct digital synthesis technology the 397 is extremely agile Operations like sweep FSK and FM are directly derived from the DDS circuit by controlling its input bits Frequency agility is described below Sweep FSK Ramped FSK FM Getting Started 1 Functional Description Nj NOTE Sweep FM and FSK modulate the sample clock frequency The frequency of the signal at the output connector is only related to the sample clock frequency through the following relationship Output Frequency SCLK number of waveform points Additional information on sample clock modulation can be found in Chapter 3 The 397 can sweep from minimum to maximum sample clock frequency setting Sweep time is programmable from 1ms to 1000 seconds with 7 digits The sweep start and stop frequency program the rear panel sine output connector You may also use the sweep from the front panel as long as you do your own calculation of start and stop frequencies depending on the present sample clock frequency and waveform length Sweep can be used in continuous mode triggered or gated run modes The 397 will also sweep up or down using linear or logarithmic increments FSK frequency shift keying function controls the sine outpu
166. ermines the shape of the modulating waveform There are two basic options Standard waveforms and Arbitrary waveforms If you do not need exotic waveforms you can use one of the built in standard wave shapes Sine Triangle Square and Ramp These waveforms can be adjusted for their frequency and deviation range On the other hand you can select the arbitrary modulating wave option where you can use any shape however you must load the modulating waveform from an external application such as the FM composer in ArbExplorer Information on the standard and arbitrary FM functions is given in Chapter 3 Click on the button next to the required modulating waveform shape to select it 4 21 397 User Manual FSK 4 22 Parameters Run Mode Trig Slope Allow adjustment of the parameters that are associated with the modulating waveform Notice that the parameters are changing between standard and arbitrary waveforms To change the FM parameters point and click on the required parameter The value that is associated with the lit LED is displayed on the digital display You can use the dial keyboard or the T H keys to adjust the readout to the required setting After you modify the reading press Execute to update the 397 with the new reading Nj Note Normal color of the digital reading is dark blue If you modify the reading the color changes to a lighter shade of blue indicating that the 397 has not been updated yet with the ne
167. es must use This avoids situations where devices from various manufacturers use different sets of commands to enable functions and report status The IEEE STD 488 2 treats common commands and queries as device dependent commands For example TRG is sent over the bus to trigger the instrument Some common commands and queries are optional but most of them are mandatory The following is a complete listing of all common commands and queries which are used by the 397 CLS Clear the Status Byte summary register and all event registers ESE enable value Enable bits in the Standard Event enable register The selected bits are then reported to the status byte ESE Query the Standard Event enable register The generator returns a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits set in the register ESR Query the Standard Event register The generator returns a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits set in the register IDN Query the generators identity The returned data is organized into four fields separated by commas The generator responds with its manufacturer and model number in the first two fields and may also report its serial number and options in fields three and four If the latter information is not available the device must return an ASCII O for each For example Model 397 response to IDN is Fluke 397 0 1 0 OPC Set the operation com
168. es the first point where the created wave will start Note that if you change the start point the left anchor will automatically adjust itself to the selected start point End defines where the created waveform will end Note that as you change the end point the right anchor will automatically adjust itself to the selected end point Waveform Amplitude The vertical axis of the Wave Composer represents 14 bits of vertical resolution That means that the equation is computed resolved and generated with 1 32 768 increments and accuracy The Waveform Amplitude fields in the Equation Editor are used in two cases 1 when the amp parameter is used in the equation or 2 if the Level Adjuster is set to Auto Information on these two operations is given later 4 43 397 User Manual 4 44 Max defines the positive peak of the vertical axis Min defines the negative peak of the vertical axis Cycles The Cycles parameter defines how many waveform cycles will be created within the specified start and end anchor points Level Adjuster The Level Adjuster is a convenient tool that helps you adjust the amplitude and offset without modifying your equation The Level Adjuster mode does not interfere with your calculations and displays the waveform as computed from your equation The only difference is that your final calculations are stretched or shrunk or offset on the vertical scale to fit the new amplitude and offset boundaries For
169. ete sequence table must divide by 8 The Model 397 has no control over data sent to its sequence table during data transfer Therefore wrong data and or incorrect number of bytes will cause erroneous sequence partition 4 The LSB bitis the only bit used in the mode byte This bit has an affect on the operation of the sequence only when Mixed Step Advance mode is active With the LSB bit set to 0 the sequence generator will advance to the next step automatically With the LSB bit set to 1 the sequence generator will advance to the next step only when a valid trigger signal will be sensed at the trigger input SEQuence ADVance AUTOmatic STEP SINGIe MIXed Purpose This command will select the sequence advance mode The way the instrument advances through the sequence links can be specified by the user e AUTOmatic specifies continuous advance where the generator steps continuously to the end of the sequence table and repeats the sequence from the start For example if a sequence is made of three segments 1 2 and 3 the sequence will generate an infinite number of 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 waveforms Of course each link segment can be programmed with its associated loop repeat number AUTO is the default sequence advance mode e n STEP advance mode the sequence is advanced to the next waveform only when a valid trigger is received The output of the 397 generates the first segment continuously until a trigger signal advances the sequen
170. etting Started 1 What s in This Chapter This chapter contains a general description of the Model 397 Universal Waveform Generator and an overall functional description of the instrument It lists and describes various options available for this model It also describes the front panel connectors and indicators Model 397 is a dual channel Universal Waveform Generator It is a high performance waveform generator that combines two separate and powerful channels in one small package Supplied free with the instrument is ArbExplorer software which is used for controlling the 397 and for generating editing and downloading waveforms from a remote computer The following highlights the 397 and ArbExplorer features e Dual output configuration with Independent waveform control e Tight phase offset control between channels 1 point resolution e 14 bit vertical resolution e Nearly 19 bit offset resolution e 4Meg memory depth for each channel e Ultra fast waveform downloads using DMA e 125MS s sample clock frequency e 100MHz rear panel sinewave output e 1 ppm clock stability e Extremely low phase noise carrier e External amplitude modulation e Sample clock modulation FSK ramped FSK sweep FM e Trigger start phase control and breakpoints e Built in standard waveforms e Separate sequence generators for each channel e Multiple instrument synchronization with tight phase control e GPIB USB and Ethernet interfaces 397 User Manual
171. eue is cleared when power has been shut off or after a CLS command has been executed 410 Query INTERRUPTED A command was received which sends data to the output buffer but the output buffer contained data from a previous command the previous data is not overwritten The output buffer is cleared when power is shut off or after a device clear has been executed Chapter 6 Maintenance and Performance Checks Title Page What s in This Chapter 6 3 Disassembly SU CUONS usce itecto cet etur tot os bep ebat bct tben obse dt nate ettet bobus Bede etude 6 3 Special Handling of Static Sensitive Devices 6 4 Mun 6 4 Repair and Replacement oooocccocococoncccnnncccnnnonnnaccnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnerinincinnns 6 5 AAA CA 6 5 Environmental Conditions cooooooooncccnnncccnnnnnnnnccnnnnncnnnonnnnnccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnninnns 6 5 Warm up Period e e exe ds 6 5 Initial Instrument Settl os oe eo etate Ie d o 6 6 Recommended Test Equipment c oooooccccccccccnccnconcccnnnncnnnnnnnnnccnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanancnnnnns 6 6 Performance Check Procedures oooccccccoocoooccccnccccncnonnnoncnonnnncnnnnnnnnncnnnnnncnnnnnnnanininnss 6 6 Frequency Accuracy Pm 6 7 A O A TET 6 8 CONSE ACCURACY RM ie a edo natant 6 8 Square wave Charachertstice 6 9 Sine Wave Characteristics oooooocccnncccococonoccconnncnononnnnnnccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnns 6 10
172. f this manual The first thing to do before you can generate sequenced waveforms is download waveforms to the 397 You may use ArbExplorer or any other application to create waveform segments Then you can build your sequence table An example of how sequenced waveforms work with three different waveforms is demonstrated in Chapter 1 Figures 1 8 through 1 11 The sequence table as shown in Figure 3 18 specifies Link Seg Loops and Adv Description of the various elements within the sequence table is given below Link This parameter defines an index array for the sequence generator When generating sequences the instrument steps though the link in descending order therefore make sure that you enter your waveform segments in exactly the order you would like them at the output Seg This parameter associates waveform segments with links You can use different segments for different links or you can use the same segment for a number of links There are no limitations how you associate links to segments except you can not program in the sequence table segments that were not defined earlier Loops This parameter define how many times the segment will loop for the selected link For example if you program 2 the waveform will cycle twice through the same segment before transitioning to the next link Adv This field is a special code that is used in conjunction with the mixed advance mode This bit flags the 397 if the selecte
173. ffect on arbitrary waveforms lt freq gt sets the waveform frequency e lt MINimum gt sets the waveform frequency to its lowest value e lt MAXimum gt sets the waveform frequency to its highest value Parameter type Numeric Parameter range freq 100e 6 to 50e6 FREQuency Response and default The 397 will return the present frequency value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100mHz would be returned as 100E 3 positive numbers are unsigned Default value is 1e6 FREQuency RASTer ssclk MINimum MAXimum Purpose This command modifies the sample clock frequency of the arbitrary waveform in units of samples per second S s It has no affect on standard waveforms lt sclk gt sets the sample clock frequency e lt MINimum gt sets the sample clock frequency to its lowest value e lt MAXimum sets the sample clock frequency to its highest value Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt sclk gt 100e 3 to 125e6 FREQuency RASTer Response and default The 397 will return the present sample clock frequency value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100MHz would be returned as 12566 positive numbers are unsigned Default value is 10e6 FREQuency RASTer SOURce EXTernal INTernal Purpose This command selects the source of the sample clock generator This command affects both the standard and the arbitrary waveforms lt EXTernal gt
174. form composers The first time you launch ArbExplorer the opening screen will have the Main panel open Click on other buttons and interactively get the feel how ArbExplorer opens and closes control panels ArbExplorers main purpose is controlling 397 functions and parameters The 397 can generate standard waveforms from a built in library arbitrary waveforms from user downloaded coordinates modulated waveforms digital patterns and much more The only way to access all of these features is through software utilities such as Plug amp Play drivers and soft front panels ArbExplorer is built to provide complete control over the 397 ArbExplorer has four main screens 1 Control panels 2 Waveform composer 3 FM composer and 4 Pulse Composer The various screens along with instructions how to access and use them are described below in detail The control panels look and feel just as if you would operate an instrument from its front panel They even look like instrument front panels so operating function and changing parameters is easy and intuitive Let s look at the first panel that shows at the opening screen This panel as shown in Figure 4 3 is called the Main Panel To begin with let s explore the panel controls to see how they feel react and what they do All other panels share almost the same feel so the description of how to operate the Main Panel can serve as general guide for controlling the rest of the panels ArbExpl
175. formance Check Procedures oooooocccccccccnoconncccnnnnccnnnnnnnnccnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnass 6 6 Frequency ACCUIAGCY X 6 7 Amplitude Mo sole C T cid dla dde 6 8 OTSEUACCUIAGCY pb 6 8 Square wave Charachertsttce tnnt ttrnteennnn nnn nnnt 6 9 Sine Wave Charachertstce esses eem eene nennen 6 10 Sine Wave Distortion oooooooocccnnccccncooonnncconnnncnnnnonnnnncnnnnncnnnnnncnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnncnnnos 6 10 Sine wave Spectral PUES icit eee ictu Senece eei ie 6 11 Trigger Operaatio Momence Doo Rupe pent darn dc eee A pd Fev d dude buts A 6 12 Trigger Gate and Burst ra A 6 12 A H 6 12 O 6 13 Internal Trigger ACCUFaCy eicere Chee iia 6 14 Sequence Operation 6 15 Automatic Advance coooooooccccnocccononononnccnnnnncnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannninnns 6 15 Step Advance adstat videtur c a I Un 6 16 Single AUVAN c Athenee abe ee 6 17 Modulated Waveforms Characteristics sesesrrerrtttrtttrttrtttttttttttrtttrtttttttttttrrrtrttttnt 6 18 O rie cA FC E 6 18 RRAMPSO HES eR 6 19 SWEEP MM 6 19 FM Std Wavetormms iii aa a a a a aa a aaa 6 21 FM Arb Waveiomms 6 22 y eser c rpm UR croacia 6 23 PIS c ERES 6 24 INTO UCI E 6 24 Descrip e EE 6 24 Environmental Condttons nrnna ttnn tnnnnnanAEEAEEEAEEEEAE EA EEEE EEEE EEEE E EEEE En EEEn 6 24 Required el etre erster ERE Nad eaten eatin 6 24 Initial Instrume
176. forms Using Equation Editor let you write equations the same way as you would the Equation do on a blank piece of paper The equations are then translated to Editor sequential points that form waveforms and are displayed on the waveform screen The Equation Editor will detect and inform you on syntax errors and with its self adjusting feature will automatically adjust your parameters so that none of the points on your waveform will exceed the maximum scale limits When you invoke the Equation Editor the dialog box as shown in Figure 4 23 will display Use the following paragraphs to learn how to use this dialog box and how to write your equations Equation Editor BE X Anchor r Waveform Amplitude Level Adjuster Start pts o Max feist Cycles C Manual End pts 1023 Min 8182 I Auto r Equation Amplitude p Remove Store Browse Operands Cancel Jamp sin 10 omg p p f 0 1 OK Figure 4 23 The Equation Editor Dialog Box There are four sub group parameters in the equation editor plus control buttons and equation field These parts are described below Anchor The anchors define start and end point of which the equation will be generated By default the anchors are placed at the start and the end of the horizontal time scale however the equation can be limited to a specific time scale by moving the anchor points from their default locations Start defin
177. g relationship between the two values is not exceeded Amplitude 2 The first thing you do before you program amplitude and offset setting is define which of the channels is being programmed The active channel is displayed at the upper right corner of the LCD display Window gt t Offset When the display shows at the upper right corner you are currently programming channel 1 parameters Keypads 1 and 2 are used as hot keys for channel selection While not editing any parameter press key 2 to program channel 2 parameters When the display shows at the upper right corner you can proceed with channel 2 programming The amplitude and offset parameters are duplicated in multiple screens however when changed for a specific function shape the new value is updated on all screens for all other function shapes Refer to Figure 3 8 and modify amplitude and offset using the procedure as described below The index numbers in Figure 3 8 correspond to the procedure steps in the following description 1 Press the Amplitude soft key button Press Enter to edit the Amplitude value Use the numeric keypad to program the new value Press m for mV or x1 for volts to select the suffix letter Press Enter to lock in the value ST du ee I9 Alternately you can modify the amplitude value with the dial and arrow keys but then the termination of the process is by pressing Enter Offset is programmed the same way as amplitude except
178. g the Equation Editor to Add Second Harmonic Distortion 4 50 4 27 Using the Equation Editor to Generate Exponentially Decaying Sinewave 4 51 4 28 Using the Editor to Build Amplitude Modulated Signal With Upper and Lower SidebandS M 4 52 4 29 Combining Waveforms into Equations AAA 4 53 5 1 Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data Fomat 5 48 5 2 16 bit Initial Waveform Data Point Representation oooooooonoooncconccooncnonnnoncnonononnnonnnnnnos 5 49 5 3 16 bit Waveform Data Point Representation 5 49 5 4 Ox1F59 Data Point Representation sseseeerensrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrerrrtrrrrrertrttrrnt 5 50 5 5 SCPI Status Registers iere eed hasbeen ER Rb un EELER ce e ER GU ERR ERR RR 5 61 0 1 Software Version Screen DE 6 29 O22 The NETCONF Utt uitio tetas ote 6 30 6 3 The Firmware Update Dialog Box nn nncnnnnnn 6 31 6 4 Firmware update Path 6 31 xi Chapter 1 Getting Started Title Page What sim This Chapter E 1 3 Introd UCTION s 3 5 2 o etate oes a AA e dnt d e dts 1 3 397 Feature Pighliglits i eet dee tata f educ uto Sete cag raw Mela tat Quidors i aie 1 3 ArbExplorer Feature Highlights cese eese nennen nnne nnnm netten enin 1 4 Description EET 1 7 Safety CONSI MON P RE 1 9 Supplied Ree ie be 1 9 SN io ME REOR DET I II 1 9 Functional Description rt eer es 1
179. g the SEQ DEF command The one step method is slow and tedious however it allows better control for one who just begins his first sequence programming Advanced users can download a complete sequence table using the binary sequence download option The later being much faster for applications requiring large sequence tables Use the information below to understand sequence commands and how to implement them in your application SEQuence lt header gt lt binary_block gt Purpose This command will build a complete sequence table in one binary download In this way there is no need to define and download individual sequencer steps Using this command sequence table data is loaded to the 397 using high speed binary transfer in a similar way to downloading waveform data with the trace command High speed binary transfer allows any 8 bit bytes including extended ASCII code to be transmitted in a message This command is particularly useful for long sequences that use a large number of segment and sequence steps As an example the next command will generate two step sequence with 12 bytes of data that contains segment number repeats loops and mixed mode flag option SEQuence121 2 lt binary block This command causes the transfer of 12 bytes of data 2 step sequence to the sequence table buffer The header is interpreted this way e The ASCII 23 designates the start of the binary data block e 2 designates the num
180. ger input connector When the gate signal is de asserted the output completes the last cycle and resumes position at a DC level equal to the last point of the waveform There is only one parameter you can adjust for the gated mode Slope Defines if the generator is gating when the trigger signal is TTL high Positive or when the trigger signal is TTL low Negative Start Positions Defines the start point on the waveform for the gating signal The start position parameter may serve as a gate delay generator where the delay is set in number of waveform points You may use the gated mode to gate standard waveforms arbitrary waveforms and sequences of waveforms The gated run mode parameters are shown in Figure 3 11 3 17 397 User Manual Burst Mode 3 18 i FUNC RRE TVPE BIT 11 RUN GRTE POSITION o Gate Parameters Advance Sra ExT sl Slope Positive KJ Timer 10 000 00kHz Triggered Gated Start Positions Channeli Channel 2 o BRSE MODE SYNC OUT Figure 3 11 Gated Mode Parameters Burst mode is similar to Triggered mode with the exception that only one trigger signal is needed to generate a counted number of output waveforms In Burst mode the output remains at a DC level as long as the trigger signal at the rear panel remains inactive The trigger input is sensitive to either the rising edge or the falling edge of the trigger signal Each time a t
181. ght Has two functions 1 When multiple parameters are displayed on the screen the cursor and the dial scroll through the parameters 2 When parameter is selected for editing cursor buttons right or left move the cursor accordingly Cursor buttons up or down modify parameter value accordingly 8 Dial Has similar functionality as the cursor UP and Down keys 9 Numeral keypad These keys are used for modifying an edited parameter value 10 Parameter Suffixes M k x1 and m These keys are used to place suffix at the end of the parameter They are also used for terminating an edit operation Program CH1 CH2 Use Program CH1 to modify the screen to display channel 1 parameters Use Program CH2 to modify the screen to display channel 2 parameters These keys can be used only when the 397 is not in edit mode 1 3 6 Using the Instrument Controlling the 397 12 ON OFF Output Sync These keys can be used only when the 397 is not in edit mode The Output ON OFF toggles output waveform at the output connector ON and OFF The Sync ON OFF toggles the sync waveform at the SYNC output connector ON and OFF Table 3 2 Front Panel Menus Soft TOP 2 Level 3 Level Key Menu Menu Menu Notes A Waveform A Standard A Waveshape Select from a wave shapes list B Frequency Programs standard waveform frequency
182. hated dette be rv c ELM tain 4 28 The Wave Compose nter e e si 4 29 The Commands bar das 4 29 ME EE 4 36 RAR ene eto ede e e be dee e eta eet ead 4 36 The FM COMPOSER m 4 38 The Commands Dale Aus rotto a ede dase Neap acu devise andes aden 4 38 Generating Waveforms Using the Equation Editor eeseeeeeseeeesesererrreessrrirrrnnsssrererenne 4 43 Writing EAU c 4 45 Equation Conventions EE EEEE NEEEnEE EEEE 4 45 BR elek te EE 4 46 Equation Samples caida pde utei bra ea a be a bet eec tat 4 47 Combining VVaVvelortris coiere ates qe ee ate dee teer ai ot qp tapas a Abd 4 52 The Pulse Compost dias 4 54 Contents continued Remote Programming Reference sssscceeeeseseeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeesseceeeeeeeeeesnseneeeeeeeeeeeees 5 1 What s In This Chapter accionada 5 3 Introduction E E EE 5 3 Command Fortes 5 4 Command Separator ococccccnncnnncnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnninnninness 5 4 The MIN and MAX Parameters sip tese en rp te Ee 5 5 Querying Parameter Setting ue oret Fes Sep Nisa ada 5 5 Query Response Format isc ccoo pea 5 5 SCP Command Terminator ec ico esito ted arica eor situato tartas Due 5 5 IEEE STD 485 2 Common Commands almalasi 5 5 SGPLP ararmelter TO A A lapsos 5 6 Illu eu CHE 5 6 Biscrete Parametels 5 eel euet tas ctetu pipa tu xus s pd e Mad a sten td 5 6 Bo lean e UE 5 6 Arbitrary Block Parameters c
183. he SCLK parameter is showing 64 00000MS s In standard waveform mode the SCLK parameter is set automatically by the instrument and can not be modified directly The information that we need from this display is the SCLK value and the number of points used for generating the current waveform In this case the number of points is computed from the relationship N SCLK Freq 64MS 1MHz 64 points 2 Now it becomes a bit tricky When generating standard waveforms the Model 397 depending on the output frequency automatically sets the number of points and their associated sample clock In FSK mode only the sample clock hops between frequencies but the number of points remain constant This means that 64 waveform points will remain for the carrier and for the shifted waveforms From this statement we can now compute the sample clock for the shifted frequency using the following equation F 64 Pts x 1 5MHz 96MS s 1 Press TOP soft key and press the following soft keys sequence Waveforms gt gt Modulated gt gt Modulation Type FSK Make sure the FSK Type shown in this display is Hop and the Carrier frequency is 64MS s 2 Press Hop Sample CIk soft key and program the hop value to 96Ms s Press Enter to lock in the new value 3 Apply your FSK control signal to the rear panel trigger input If you did not make any programming errors the front panel outputs 3 41 397 User Manual Example 2 FSK Using Arbitrary Waveforms 3 42
184. he Wave command select Noise Click OK and watch your waveform screen draw noisy signal From the File menu select Save Waveform As and save this waveform using the name Noise wav ArbExplorerO 4 Step 3 Write and compute the original equation Amplitude p Sine wav sin omg p 5 Noise wav 10 If you did not make any mistakes your waveform screen should look as shown in Figure 4 29 Figure 4 29 Combining Waveforms into Equations 4 53 397 User Manual The Pulse Composer The Pulse Composer is a great tool for creating and editing pulses without the need to think about sample clock number of points and complex equations Pulses are created on the screen in a special dialog box simply and efficiently by typing in the width and level or by using the rubber band method to place straight line segments with the exact amplitude and time duration The pulse composer can also sequence pulse segments in user definable fashion to create pulse duplication along lengthy time intervals When you finally have your pulse design on the screen the program determines if the pulse design will fit in one memory segment or use multiple segments and employ the sequence generator for repeatable segments In either case bear in mind that if you already have some waveforms stored in memory segments these will be erased to make room for the new pulse design If you insist to keep arbitrary waveforms and still downl
185. he driver you choose will be the best match for your hardware Figure 2 5 Choose Your Search and installation Options Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard The wizard has finished installing the software for e FLUKE 397 USB Arbitrary Waveform Generator Click Finish to close the wizard Figure 2 6 New Hardware Found and Software installed Figure 2 6 shows that the Fluke 397 USB Waveform Generator has been found and software driver installed However the process does not end at this point but continues to assign a logical port address to the USB driver After you click on Finish the Found New Hardware message appears however this time it has found a USB serial port as shown in Figure 2 7 397 User Manual i Found New Hardware USB Serial Port Figure 2 7 Found New Hardware USB Serial Port Proceed with the installation till a logical drive is assigned to the USB port The process is very similar to what you have done before just select the path and options in the next dialog box and click on Next as shown in Figure 2 8 To complete the process click on Finish Found New Hardware Wizard Please choose your search and installation options Use the check boxes below to limit or expand the default search which includes local paths and removable media The best driver found will be installed C Search removable media floppy CD ROM Include this location in the search
186. he example shows start point set at point O End Point Defines where the created waveform will end Note that as you change the end point the right anchor will automatically adjust itself to the selected end point The example shows end point set at point 499 Cycles The Cycles parameter defines how many sine cycles will be created within the specified start and end points The example below shows five sine cycles Amplitude 14 bit of vertical define 16 384 incremental steps The Amplitude parameter defines how many of these steps are used for generating the sine The example is showing sine waveform with maximum peak to peak amplitude Any number below the maximum will generate an attenuated sine Start Phase The start phase parameter defines the angle of which the sine will start The example shows start phase of 90 Power The example shows sine cubed Sine to the power of 1 will generate a perfect sine Power range is from 1 through 9 4 35 397 User Manual Stat ipt 0 End pts 499 Figure 4 18 Generating Distorted Sine waves from the built in Library The Toolbar The toolbar contains icons for editing the waveform screen icons for saving and loading waveforms fields for selecting an active channel and for adjusting segment length and more The Toolbar is shown in Figure 4 19 For the individual icons refer to the descriptions above of the Wave Composer Menus The Waveform Screen 4 36
187. he same method the sample clock for the shift frequency is 25MS s 25M 1000 25kHz Now that we have both frequency values for the carrier and the shifted sample clock we can go directly to front panel programming 1 Press TOP soft key and press the following soft keys sequence Waveforms gt gt Modulated gt gt Modulation Type FSK Make sure the FSK Type shown in this display is Hop and the Carrier shows Arb If the carrier waveform is showing Std backup to the Top menu and select the Arbitrary waveform option 2 Press Hop Sample Clk soft key and program the hop value to 25Ms s Press Enter to lock in the new value 3 Press Carrier Sample Clk soft key and the value to 10MS s Press Enter to lock in the new value 4 Apply your FSK control signal to the trigger input If you did not make any programming errors the front panel outputs will generate FSK modulated waveforms having carrier frequency of 10kHz and shifted frequency of 25kHz We ll now check the results at the rear panel sine output connector and compare what we get there to what we see on the front panel Remove the cable from the main output connector and connect to Using the Instrument Generating Modulated Waveforms the rear panel SINE OUT connector Here is what you should expect to see when you check this output Carrier waveform is around 1V into 500 carrier frequency is 10MHz Shifted frequency is 25MHz Sweep In sweep modulation the 397 sweeps from s
188. he start address for segment number 2 is as follows 5 52 Remote Programming Reference TRACe Subsystem ADD ADD SIZE 4 256 10 000 4 256 2 500 2756 and in hex 0x100 0x9C4 OxAC4 The segment size is entered using the actual size of the segment Do not divide the segment size as was done for the address For a size of 10 000 use 0x2710 Generating Sequenced Waveforms Sequenced waveforms are made of a number of arbitrary waveforms which can be linked and looped in user programmable order Sequenced waveforms are generated from waveforms stored in the 397 as memory segments Therefore before a sequence can be used download waveform segments to the arbitrary memory using TRAC Information on how to partition the memory and how to download waveforms is given in the section entitled Generating Arbitrary Waveforms An example of how sequenced waveforms work is demonstrated in figure 1 8 through 1 11 The sequence generator lets you link and loop segments in user defined order Figure 1 11 shows a sequence of waveforms that were stored in three different memory segments There are a number of tools that you can use to build a sequence table The easiest way is of course to use the ArbExplorer program Information how to use the ArbExplorer program is given in a later chapter In other cases SCPI programming allows low level programming of sequence tables In general sequences can be build one step at a time usin
189. heeds Sane ica eve esis neni nia eee Me eee 3 43 Example 1 Generating Sweep Using Standard Waveforms 3 45 Example 2 Generating Sweep Using Arbitrary Waveforms eeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeee 3 47 AME sed ito e uds ob o p ea ic ha vedo ene Leta IRL end 3 48 iii 397 User Manual Adjusting Phase Offset Between Channels cccccccseccccecceeeeeeteseeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 3 49 Synchronizing Multiple Instruments 222 cccccceeeeeseseceeeeeeeeeteeeseceeeeeceneseseseceuaeceteeeeneee 3 51 4 AHE OO O EE 4 1 Whats in This e ue 4 3 Introduction to Arbtvplorer mmn 4 3 Installing ADE is eia t cett toto in rara aed ecules 4 3 Quilting AD EX PIO e atomica ne ee tela uted are ene o A AAA 4 4 For the New and Advanced Users eene 4 4 Conventions Used in This Manual 4 4 TAS STI CSS m re R 4 5 ArbExplorer Features t eret ette e eres ERE e CP PER EPA ides 4 6 The Control Panels oret e ER OR Te ERR ERE Pe XE dee dunes ee ees ie 4 6 The Main Panel eA ET 4 8 The Standard Waveforms Panel 4 10 The Arbitrary amp Sequence Panel eeesee e 4 11 Using the Memory Partition Table eene enne nnn innen 4 13 Using the Waveform Studio GEET 4 15 TG TQS PAINS EE 4 19 The Modulation Panel 1 4 21 gem E 4 21 EE A EE 4 22 Ihe Modulation Pariel2 5 rtr tt ero EA d HR AERE EE ER 4 23 PUMA EE 4 23 A WE 4 24 Te UH mem 4 25 The Command Editors ici cR bee bera t t
190. her instrument command The STB command returns the same result as a serial poll but the request service bit bit 6 is not cleared if a serial poll has occurred TRG Triggers the generator from the remote interface This command effects the generator if it is first placed in the Trigger or Burst mode of operation and the trigger source is set to BUS WAI Wait for all pending operations to complete before executing any additional commands over the interface The Model 397 uses the Status Byte register group and the Standard Event register group to record various instrument conditions Figure 5 1 shows the SCPI status system An Event Register is a read only register that reports defined conditions within the generator Bits in an event register are latched When an event bit is set subsequent state changes are ignored Bits in an event register are automatically cleared by a query of that register or by sending the CLS command The RST command or device clear does not clear bits in an event register Querying an event register returns a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits set in the register An Event Register defines which bits in the corresponding event register are logically ORed together to form a single summary bit The user can read from and write to an Enable Register Querying an Enable Register will not clear it The CLS command does not clear Enable Registers but it does clear
191. ic eR retard de theta eu Reip ope bt 5 7 Binary Block Parameters vicio aaa 5 7 EIERE aia 5 7 gt QURCO SUD Si Miastenia orate tea und 5 14 OUT Ee E EE 5 37 INSTrument SubSystern eite la 5 40 TRIGG E EE 5 42 TRACES SUSY Mitra diodos 5 47 SYSTEM SUBS EE 5 57 IEEE STD 488 2 Common Commands and Queries ccccococcccnnononcninanananininana conc nanana nn 5 58 The SCPI Status Reglslers ma aiii 5 59 The Status Byte Register H EE 5 60 Reading the Status Byte Register seeeeeeesessseeeeeete ener 5 62 Clearing the Status Byte Register 5 62 Service Request Enable Register SRE eese 5 62 Standard Event Status Register ESR eeeeeeees 5 63 Standard Event Status Enable Register EE 5 64 EMO Messages sc sop doo ee aha a es a o A ae pac 5 64 Maintenance and Performance Checks esee enne 6 1 What s in This Chapter eesse cernere a a a a E a E ei e 6 3 Disassembly Instruccional A a Rute aa naetaat 6 3 Special Handling of Static Sensitive Devices seeseeeeee nenne 6 4 CIA id id E 6 4 Repair and Replacement siii id 6 5 P rtormance Checks o Fade ARP 6 5 Environmental GondillODS signi booa a tot aub ate bea in oe cipue enden bd 6 5 397 User Manual Warm up Eet x reri eerte tue des eig etae edge eee teu tee de eA Ms 6 5 Initial Instrument Setting carre lacra Rog ENEE 6 6 Recommended Test Equipment ener 6 6 Per
192. ier in this chapter or you can do it from the Outputs menus shown in Figure 3 14 Channel 1 Output ON Filter 50M 4 Channel 2 BRSE MODE SYNC OUT SYNC Pulse Dutput Type Position Width gt Output OFF Filter NONE Offset Channel 2 Divider 1 CH 2 gt CH 1 1 TRIGGERED EXT START Pt 0 SLOPE POSITIVE FUNC ARB TYPE BIT 11 RUN TRIG POSITION 100 Figure 3 14 SYNC and Filter Parameters There are four parameters you can adjust for this function State Turns the SYNC output on and off Note that the termination of the output state shifts the dc level to OV but leaves a low impedance path to the connector and therefore if your UUT unit under test is sensitive to level transitions make sure you remove the cable from this connector before turning the output state off Type Provides selection between two types of signals BIT and LCOM The BIT mode is recommended to be used in standard and arbitrary modes only The sync output generates a single sync signal with every waveform cycle The LCOM loop complete option generates a sync signal in sequenced mode only The signal starts with the selected active segment and stops only after the sequence loop has completed Position Lets you place the sync bit at any point along the length of the waveform Placement resolution is 4 points As default the sync signal is positioned at the beginning of the wavefo
193. iew Wave Download About re eae sie se pee x y Marker tist fo L Anchor 0 Start pts f End pts E r Peak Deviation Max 1000 Min 00000 r Wave Properties Cycles 1 Start Phase 0 Power 1 Figure 1 4 ArbExplorer The FM Wave Composer Es Pulse Composer bs E S File View Download About 999 Points eo Co Jus Time units msec Repeat 3 Zeg Sat H Duration 1385 Train Style Specification CSC SS Time Level Points EERENI Pulse Sequence Man Al o c 0 0 iR C INS eo cGoooooooom a 3116 25 Figure 1 5 ArbExplorer The Pulse Composer Description Two Channels Output Functions Frequency Amplitude Run Modes Arbitrary Waveforms Getting Started 1 Description Detailed functional description is given following the general description of the features functions and options available with the 397 The 397 is a dual channel arbitrary waveform generator Although the two channels share a single sample clock source each channel can be controlled separately to generate different waveform amplitude and waveforms sequence Having a single sample clock source is an advantage in a dual channel configuration because it allows tight control over inter channel synchronization and leading edge start phase where the initial skew between the two channels is just a few nanoseconds Model 397 is complete
194. if you use the keypad In case you do the program will not let you download an illegal parameter and you ll be requested to correct your setting The Modulation The Modulation Panel 2 as shown in Figure 4 11 controls Sweep Panel 2 and AM modulation Description of the controls in this panel is given below The panel is invoked by pressing the MOD2 button on the panels bar AM The AM function requires an external modulating signal The AM input is common to both channels however modulation for each channel can be turned on and off separately There are two buttons in this group press Channel 1 or Channel 2 to turn on the modulation function for the required channel Watch the limitations of the modulating signal as specified in Appendix A 4 23 397 User Manual Sweep 4 24 Parameters Figure 4 11 The Modulation Panel 2 The Sweep group contains parameters for controlling sweep options To turn the Sweep function on and off click on the State button in this group The various parameters that control sweep features are described below Allow adjustment of Sweep Start Stop and Sweep Time You can also place a marker at a position programmed by the Mark parameter To access the required parameter click on the button below parameters sub group until the LED next to the required parameter turns on The value that is associated with the lit LED is displayed on the digital display You can use the dial keyboard or the 1
195. illoscope Reading Triggered 10 KHz TTL 20 ns width Triggered waveform 10 KHz TTL 50 duty cycle Gated Waveform Burst 106 counts Single shot TTL 20 ns width 106 waveforms triggered Internal Trigger Onecyceeveryims __ Trigger Slope Equipment Oscilloscope function generator Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Termination 20dB 50Q feedthrough attenuator Setup As required for the test Trigger Source External 6 12 Maintenance and Performance Checks Trigger Operation 2 Connect 397 Channel 1 2 output to the oscilloscope input Place the feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope inputs 3 Configure the function generator as follows Frequency 1kHz Run Mode Continue Waveform TTL Output 4 Connect the function generator TTL output to the 397 TRIG IN connector 5 Connect the function generator main output to the 2 channel of the oscilloscope 6 Configure the 397 channels 1 2 as follows Reset Frequency 10kHz Run Mode Trigger Output On Test Procedure 7 Toggle 397 trigger slope from positive to negative visa versa 1 Verify on the oscilloscope that the 397 transitions are synchronized with the slope of the trigger Test Results Pass Fail Trigger Phase Equipment Oscilloscope function generator Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Termination 20dB 50 feedthrough attenuator Setup As required for the test
196. ing the TRIG button on the Panels bar Note that if you invoke the Trigger Panel from the Panels menu the 397 will not change its trigger mode To modify the instrument run mode use the Main Panel The trigger parameters and setting in the Trigger Panel will have an effect on the 397 only if an appropriate run mode setting has been selected The functional groups in the Trigger Panel are described below A A A A ae GR Count N min 1 max 1e6 Figure 4 9 The Trigger Panel Trigger Parameters The Trigger Parameters group provides access to trigger phase start and burst count To change trigger start phase or burst count point and click on one of these parameters The value that is associated with the lit LED is displayed on the digital display You can use the dial keyboard or the 1 H keys to adjust the readout to the required setting After you modify the reading press Execute to update the 397 with the new reading 4 19 397 User Manual 4 20 Slope Source Arm Nj Note Normal color of the digital reading is dark blue If you modify the reading the color changes to a lighter shade of blue indicating that the 397 has not been updated yet with the new parameter Pressing Execute will update the instrument and will restore the color of the digital readout to dark blue indicating that the displayed value is the same as the generator setting Also note that the digital readout has an autodetect mechani
197. ing paragraphs Refer to Figure 3 2 throughout this description 1 2 Power Switch Toggles 397 power ON and OFF Menu Top Selects the root menu This button is disabled during parameter editing Menu Soft Keys Soft keys have two functions 1 Selects output function shape or operating mode 2 Selects parameter to be audited These buttons are disabled during parameter editing Menu Back Backs up one menu position This button is disabled during parameter editing Cancel Local Has two functions 1 When in edit mode cancels edit operation and restore last value 2 When operating the 397 from a remote interface none of the front panel buttons are active The Local button moves control back from remote to front panel buttons 3 5 397 User Manual Waveform outputs 64 000 000 OMHz BRSE MODE NC Ol GGERE FUNC STD TVPE BIT START Pt o RUN TRIG POSITION o SLOPE POSITIVE 4 Figure 3 2 397 Front Panel Operation 6 Enter Man Trig Has two functions 1 When multiple parameters are displayed on the screen the cursor and the dial scroll through the parameters Pressing Enter selects the parameter for edit After the parameter has been modified the Enter button locks in the new variable and releases the buttons for other operations 2 When the 397 is placed in Triggered run mode the Man Trig button can be used to manually trigger the 397 7 Cursor UP Down Left and Ri
198. ional command may open a dialog box or generate an immediate action For example Clicking on File and then Exit will cause an immediate termination of the Wave Composer On the other hand clicking on Wave and then on Sine will open a Sine Wave dialog box that lets you program and edit sine wave parameters The various commands in the Commands bar are listed and described below 4 29 397 User Manual File Commands The File command has 4 command lines that control waveform files Also use this command to print the active waveform or exit the wave composer program Description of the various commands under File is given below New Waveform The New Waveform Ctrl N command will remove the waveform from the screen If you made changes to the waveform area and use the New Waveform command you should save your work before clearing the screen The New Waveform command is destructive to the displayed waveform D Wave Composer C Progr am PIE Fluke Ed Mot Tem51 wa0 L Anchors D 8191 Points Figure 4 15 The Wave Composer Opening Screen Open Waveform The Open Waveform Ctrl O command will let you browse your disk for previously saved waveform files and load these waveforms to the waveform area This command is also very useful for converting waveform files to format that is acceptable by the Wave Composer The Open Waveform command can convert ASCII CSV comma delimited text PRN space delimited text and 0
199. ions Therefore make sure you omit such sections of the waveform when you use this operation Filter The Filter used with this command is moving average This is done by recalculating each point as an average of symmetrical number of adjacent points When you select the Filter command a dialog box pops up letting you program the filter spacing in number of adjacent points You can filter the entire waveform or you may chose to filter a segment of the waveform by placing the anchors as boundaries on the left and right of the segment Invert The Invert command lets you invert the entire waveforms or marked segments of waveforms The waveform is inverted about the O point axis Trim Left The trim left command lets you trim waveforms to the left of the anchor point This command is grayed out if the left anchor was not moved from its original left position The waveform is trimmed and the point at the left anchor point becomes the first point of the waveform ArbExplorer The Wave Composer Trim Right The trim right command lets you trim waveforms to the right of the anchor point This command is grayed out if the right anchor was not moved from its original right position The waveform is trimmed and the point at the right anchor point becomes the last point of the waveform Unmark The unmark command removes the anchors from the waveform screen and resets anchor positions to point O and the last waveform point Undo The Und
200. is command will turn the 397 output on and off ON or 1 will set the output on OFF or O will set the output off Parameter type Discrete OUTPut Response and default The 397 will return 1 if the output is on or O if the output is off Default value is 0 OUTPut FILTer NONE 25M 50M ALL Purpose This command will select which filter is connected to the 397 output Observe the following restrictions when you try to use this command 1 Filter selection is not available when the instrument is set to output the standard sine waveform In fact the default waveform shape is sine Therefore filter selection will be available for use only after you select a different waveform or change the output mode to use 2 Filters are placed before the output amplifier Therefore do not expect the filters to remove in band amplifier harmonics and spurious NONE will disconnect all filters from the output path 25M will connect 25 MHz low pass elliptic filter 50M will connect 50 MHz low pass elliptic filter ALL will connect both the 25 MHz and the 50 MHz filters in series 5 37 397 User Manual Parameter type Discrete OUTPut FILTer Response and default The 397 will return NONE 25M 50M or ALL depending on the type of filter presently connected to the output Default value is NONE OUTPut SYNC OFF ON 0 1 Purpose This command will turn the 397 SYNC output on and off The SYNC output state is programmable per channel ONo
201. itive one may use the sequence generator to take these segments and replay them as part of the complete waveform without loosing valuable memory space and without scarifying waveform coherences or integrity The tool for using repetitive and multiple segments in one long waveform is called Sequence Generator The 397 has two separate sequence generators one for each channel and ArbExplorer has a special dialog box where sequences are designed This tool is called Sequence Table Using the Sequence table you can use waveforms that you already downloaded to the 397 from the Segment table link and loop in random order to create one long and complex waveform that combines the individual memory segments File name r Sequence table Append Loops Adv Loaded C Program FilessFlukeSw ave 1 wav 1000 2 Loaded C Program Files Fluke Wave_2 wav 240 Delete 2 4 2 1 3 Mapped C Program FileskFluke w ave 3 wav 240 3 1 4 Loaded C 4 SArbExplorer Mot PulsSing1 0 88 4 2 1 0 5 3 4 1 imet 2 15 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Download Waveform Shape segment 1 E EE bu Figure 4 8 The Sequence Table 4 17 397 User Manual 4 18 The Sequence Table is demonstrated in Figure 4 8 To access the Sequence table click anywhere on the Sequence Table area If it was not yet it will turn white as opposed to the Segment Table area that turns gray There a
202. itrary waveform from an external application Parameter type Discrete FM FUNCtion MODE Response and default The 397 will return FIX or USER depending on its present setting Default is FIX FM FUNCtion SHAPe SINusoid TRlangle SQUare RAMP Purpose This command will select one of the waveform shapes as the active modulating waveform e SiNusoid will select sine shape as modulating waveform e TRlangle will select triangular shape as modulating waveform e SQuare will select square shape as modulating waveform RAMP will select ramp shape as modulating waveform Parameter type Discrete FM FUNCtion SHAPe Response and default The 397 will return SIN TRI SQU or RAMP depending on its present setting Default is SIN FM FREQuency FM freq Purpose This command will set the modulating wave frequency This parameter affects the 397 when set to operate in FM FUNC MODE FIX FM freq will set the frequency of the modulating waveform Parameter type Numeric Parameter range FM freq 1e 3 to 12566 in units of hertz FM FREQuency Response and default The 397 will return the present modulating waveform frequency value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100mHz would be returned as 100E 3 positive numbers are unsigned Default value is 1e3 5 23 397 User Manual FM FREQuency RASTer FM sclk Purpose This command will set the modulating wave sample clock frequency This par
203. known state is by resetting the instrument to factory defaults Observe Figure 3 1 and reset parameters to factory defaults as follows 1 Press the Utilities soft key 2 Scroll down to the or 3 Press button 3 to restore factory defaults Table 3 1 summarizes factory defaults for the most common parameters A complete list of all parameters their defaults as well as their maximum and minimum values is given in Chapter 4 ES 397 WAVEFORM GENERATOR cm cna foureur sync DED ED COCOCORB V ODO OOOO e 4n MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG Figure 3 1 Reset 397 to Factory Defaults Controlling the 397 Using the Instrument 3 Controlling the 397 Table 3 1 Default Conditions After Reset Function Parameter Default Inter Channel Dependency Output State Off Separate Operating Mode Continuous Common SYNC State Off Common Output Function Standard Separate Output Function Shape Sine Separate Standard Wave Frequency 1MHz Common User Wave Sample Clock 10MS s Common Sample Clock Source amp Reference Internal Common Channel 2 Clock Divider 1 Separate Amplitude 5V Separate Offset OV Separate Filter State Off Separate Filter Type Auto Separate Trigger Slope Positive Common Internal Trigger Rate 1kHz Common Modulation State Off Common DMA State Off Separate Controlling 397 function modes and parameters is simply a matter of pressing once or twice the appropriate button as described in the follow
204. l 2 Waveform generation and editing and 3 FM waveform generation and editing These operating options are described in this chapter however you must install ArbExplorer before you can use it The next paragraphs describe installation and first steps before going into in depth operation The installation program installs ArbExplorer on a logical drive of your choice The default is drive C It automatically creates a new directory and copies the files that are required to run the program Before you install ArbExplorer make sure that there is at least 10 megabytes of available memory on your hard disk drive To install ArbExplorer insert the distribution disk in the A drive Invoke Run and type A NSetup The install program does the complete job far you and creates a workgroup and icons to start ArbExplorer 4 3 397 User Manual Quitting ArbExplorer For the New and Advanced Users Conventions Used in This Manual 4 4 Before you start roaming through menus and editing commands we strongly recommend that you make yourself familiar with ArbExplorer basics and concept For now quit the program and spend some more time with this section of the manual Point the mouse cursor to the File menu and press the left mouse button Move the mouse cursor to the Exit command and press the left mouse button For the New User Learning to use ArbExplorer is easy intuitive and quick even if you have never used such programs before Af
205. l change to the selected option The default waveform type is Standard If you want to change standard waveform parameters you can select this STD panel from the Panels bar The Run Mode group is used for selecting the active run mode for the instrument You can select between continuous triggered gated and burst modes There is no additional panel associated with the continuous mode but if you press one of the other run mode options you ll be able to adjust the trigger parameters from the Trigger Panel The SYNC Output group controls SYNC type and state It also sets the position of the sync and its width The SYNC output is enabled when the State button is ON The SYNC Type toggles between Bit and LCOM The LCOM loop Complete qualifier is desirable in Sequenced wave mode where the sync will transition only once at the selected segment and will remain high throughout the duration of the sequence The position parameter defines where on the waveform the sync will transition and the width define the width of the sync pulse These two parameters are available for programming the Bit option The LCOM will not change if you modify this parameter The Output group is used for controlling the state of the 397 channel 1 and 2 outputs Click on the State buttons to toggle the outputs on and off 4 9 397 User Manual The Standard Waveforms Panel 4 10 Waveforms Channel 1 and 2 The Standard Waveforms panel as shown in Figur
206. l command that programs the 397 to output user defined waveform along with its associated parameters e lt seg gt selects the active segment number lt sclk gt sets the sample clock frequency in units of samples per second e ampl sets the output amplitude in units of volts lt offs gt sets the output offset in units of volts Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt seg gt 1 to 4096 lt sclk gt 10e 6 to 125e6 lt ampl gt 10e 3 to 10 lt offs gt 4 5 to 4 5 APPLy USER Response The 397 will return lt seg gt lt sclk gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt Default values are 1 10e6 5 0 PHASe OFFSet phase offs Purpose This command programs the start phase offset between channels 1 and 2 in units of waveform points Phase offset resolution when using this command is 1 point phase offs sets the phase offset between the channels Phase offset is in waveform points Parameter type Numeric Parameter range phase offe 0 to 4M 5 20 Remote Programming Reference SOURce Subsystem PHASe OFFSet Response and default The 397 will return the present phase offset value Default value is O FM OFF JONJ0 1 Purpose This command will turn the FM function on and off ON or 1 will set the FM on OFF or 0 will set the FM off Parameter type Boolean FM Response and default The 397 will return 1 if the FM is on or O if the FM is off Default is O FM DATAZ header binary block Pur
207. ler segments and different waveforms can be loaded into each segment The various segments may then be loaded into a sequence table to generate long and complex waveforms The sequence table can link up to 2048 segments while each segment can loop up to 1 million times The instrument must be used in conjunction with a host computer All of its functions modes and parameters are fully programmable using SCPI commands and syntax There are three ways to program the Model 397 the first being low level programming of each individual parameter using SCPI commands The second alternative is to use ArbExplorer for high level programming ArbExplorer is a software package supplied with the 397 that simulates a mechanical front panel It has all the necessary push buttons displays and dials to operate the instrument as if you were using it on the bench The third alternative is using application specific drivers such LabVIEW The instrument generates its sample clock from a DDS circuit direct digital synthesis The DDS circuit enables frequency agility through the complete frequency range of the 397 Having such an enormous range opens the door for a wide range of applications such as wide band sweep FSK and frequency modulation The 397 can generate FSK Ramped FSK and Linear or Logarithmic sweep The instrument can also frequency modulate its carrier using one of its built in waveforms or with any user defined modulating signal which can be dow
208. llocated to one single waveform On the other hand there is no need to use the entire memory for only one waveform The arbitrary memory can be divided into smaller segments and each segment loaded with different waveform then the instrument can be programmed to output one segment at a time Loading data to arbitrary waveform memory can be a time consuming task especially if all 4 Meg points are loaded in one shot The 397 utilizes a DMA direct memory access concept that speeds data transfer from host computer to the instrument In this mode the memory bank is disconnected from the CPU circuit and re routed to the remote bus for direct memory accessing by the host computer The sequence generator is a powerful tool that lets you link and loop segments in any way you desire As a simple example of a sequenced waveform look at Figures 1 8 through 1 10 The waveforms shown in these figures were placed in memory Getting Started 1 Functional Description segments 1 2 and 3 respectively The sequence generator takes these three waveforms links and loops them in a predefined order to generate the waveform shown in Figure 1 11 The sequence circuit is useful for generating long waveforms with repeated sections The repeated waveform has to be programmed once and the repeater loops on this segment as many times as selected When in sequenced mode there is no loss of time between linked or looped segments Figure 1
209. look like Figure 4 26 4 49 397 User Manual 4 50 Figure 4 26 Using the Equation Editor to Add Second Harmonic Distortion In Figure 4 30 we created 10 cycles of sinewave made to decay exponentially The original expression for a standard sinewave is multiplied by the term e p 250 Increasing the value of the divisor 200 in this case will slow down the rate of decay Use the following equation Amplitude p 28000 sin omg p 10 e p 250 Press Preview Your screen should look like Figure 4 27 ArbExplorerO 4 L Anchor 0 Figure 4 27 Using the Equation Editor to Generate Exponentially Decaying Sinewave The last example as shown in Figure 4 28 is the most complex to be discussed here Here 100 cycles of sinewave are amplitude modulated with 10 cycles of sine wave with a modulation depth of 20 To achieve this the upper and lower sidebands are defined separately and added to the fundamental or carrier The upper sideband is produced by the expression 100 cos 110 omg p and the lower sideband by the term 100 cos 90 omg p Use the following equation Ampl p 8000 sin 100 omg p 1600 cos 110 omg p 1600 cos 90 omg p Press Preview Your screen should look like Figure 4 28 4 51 397 User Manual inl xl File Edit View Wave Download About we Chan Chan n 1 2 R Anchor 1023 Kl 1 1 It um E x r Anchor W aveform Amplit
210. lt phase offs gt 0 0 4M OFF ON 0 1 OFF lt header gt lt binary block lt deviation gt 1e6 100e 3 125e6 FIXed USER FIXed SINusoid TRIangle SQUare RAMP SINusoid FM freq 1e3 1e 3 100e3 FM sclk le6 1e 3 2e6 CONTinuous TRIGgered GATed CONTinuous POSitive NEGative POSitive freq MINimum MAXimum 1e6 100e 6 Diet lt sclk gt MINimum MAXimum 10e6 100e 3 125e6 EXTernal INTernal INTernal lt divider gt 1 1 65535 OFF ON 0 1 OFF FSK sclk 80e6 100e 3 125e6 HOP RAMP HOP lt time gt 1e 3 10e 6 1 FIXed USER SEQuence FIXed SINusoid TRIangle SQUare PULSe RAMP SINC EXPonential GAUSsian NOISe DC SINusoid INTernal EXTernal INTernal OFF ON 0 1 OFF stop sclk gt 20e6 100e 3 125e6 time 1e 3 1e 3 1000 DIRection SPACing TRIGger MODE 2 SLOPe MARKer 7 VOLTage OFFSet SINusoid PHASe TRIangle PHASe 7 SQUare DCYCle 7 PULSe DELay WIDTh TRANSition TRAiling RAMP DELay TRANsition TRAiling SINC NCYCLe i GAUSsian EXPonent EXPonential EXPonent DC SI AM OFF ON 0 1 Purpose Remote Programming Reference UP DONW LINear LOGarithmic CONTinuous TRIGgered GATed POSitive NEGative mark sclk lt amp1 gt MINimum MAXimum lt offs gt lt phase gt lt phase gt duty cycle delay pulse width rise fall
211. ly digital There are no analog functions resident in its hardware circuits Data has to be downloaded to the instrument for it to start generating waveforms The instrument can generate a few standard functions such as sine wave triangular wave and square wave Each time that a standard function is required the instrument calculates its coordinates and places them in the waveform memory Therefore every time a standard function is selected minimal time is required for the controller to compute the function and load its data to the waveform memory Waveform frequency is programmed with 9 digits Frequency accuracy of the output waveform is determined by the clock reference The internal reference oscillator provides 1ppm accuracy and stability over time and temperature If higher accuracy and or stability are required you may connect an external frequency reference to the rear panel reference input connector The output level may be programmed separately for each channel within from 20mV to 20Vp p into an open circuit or 10mV to 10V into 500 Offset may be applied to the output to shift the signal either positive or negative Offset and amplitude are inter related so make sure you understand the offset amplitude ranges before you apply offset to your signal A special fine offset generator is built into each channel which allows programming of extremely small offset increments This feature extends the offset resolution to 6 digits and is ve
212. mber of waveform points If you are using standard waveforms you can determine the number of points that the 397 is using from the standard waveform Note the Freq and the SCLK values The number of points is derived from the following relationship Number of Waveform Points SCLK Freq Knowing the number of points you can easily calculate the phase point from the above equation When you modify the phase offset parameter you are offsetting the phase of channel 2 in reference to edge of channel 1 For example if you program phase offset of 100 points and check the results on an oscilloscope what you should expect to see is channel 2 start phase lagging channel 1 by 100 points Phase offset between channels is programmed in the Outputs menu as shown in Figure 3 27 Place the cursor on the CH 2 gt CH 1 field and press Enter Modify the value using the numeric keypad or the dial and then press Enter to lock in the new value SYNC Pulse Output UN Type Bit l Position ee 0 Width 50M FUNC MOD TYPE BIT BREAKPOINT 1 RUN CONT POSITION SLOPE POSITIUE Figure 3 28 Adjusting Phase Offset Between Channels Using the Instrument Synchronizing Multiple Instruments Synchronizing The Fluke 397 comes with two output channels In applications requiring more output channels as well as complete control over Multiple inter channel synchronization you can not just use separate instruments inst
213. ms rise sets the rise time parameter Parameter type Numeric Parameter range rise 0 to 99 9 in units of percent 5 33 397 User Manual PULSe TRANsition Response and default The 397 will return the present rise time value Default value is 10 PULSe TRANsition TRAiling lt fall gt Purpose This command programs pulse transition from high to low of the standard pulse waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms e lt fall gt sets the fall time parameter Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt fall gt 0 to 99 9 in units of percent PULSe TRANsition TRAiling Response and default The 397 will return the present fall time value Default value is 10 RAMP DELay lt delay gt Purpose This command programs delay of the standard ramp waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms delay sets the delay parameter Parameter type Numeric Parameter range delay 0 to 99 9 in units of percent RAMP DELay Response and default The 397 will return the present delay value Default value is 0 RAMP TRANsition lt rise gt Purpose This command programs ramp transition from low to high of the standard ramp waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms rise sets the rise time parameter Parameter type Numeric Parameter range rise 0 to 99 9 in units of percent 5 34 Remote Programming Reference SOURce Subsystem RAMP TRANsition Res
214. n UP DOWN Purpose This command will select the sweep direction up and down e lt UP gt selects an up direction The sample clock will sweep from start frequency set by the sclk parameter to stop frequency set by the stop sclk parameter e lt DOWN gt selects the down direction The sample clock will sweep from stop frequency set by the stop sclk parameter to start frequency set by the sclk parameter Parameter type Discrete SWEep DIRection Response and default The 397 will return UP or DOWN depending on the present 397 setting Default value is UP SWEep SPACing LINear LOGarithmic Purpose This command will select the sweep spacing from linear spacing and logarithmic spacing 5 29 397 User Manual lt LINear gt will select linear steps e lt LOGarithmic gt will select logarithmic steps Parameter type Discrete SWEep SPACing Response and default The 397 will return LIN or LOG depending on the present 397 setting Default value is LIN SWEep TRIGger MODE CONTinuous TRIGered GATEd Purpose This command will select one of the sweep modes CONTinuous will select continuous sweep modulation e TRIGered will select triggered sweep modulation e GATEd will select gated sweep modulation Parameter type Discrete SWEep TRIGger MODE Response and default The 397 will return CONT TRIG or GATE depending on its present setting Default is CONT SWEep TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative Purpose This command
215. nd 9 pin DSUB connector labeled Master Slave Optional consult factory at the time of purchase Rear panel SMB ECL into 500 terminated to 2V Rear panel SMB ECL 506 terminated to 2V 4ns Rear panel 9 pin DSUB Rear panel BNC 10kQ 5 TTL 20ns Positive or negative going edge 397 User Manual 10 MHz Reference Input Connector Impedance Threshold Level Duty Cycle AM Input Modulation Input Impedance Max Input Voltage Sensitivity Source Modulation Range Bandwidth GENERAL GPIB Information GPIB Revision SCPI Revision Logical Address Settings DMA Ethernet Connector Physical Layer Baud Rate Protocol USB Connector Specifications Protocol Front Panel Display Front Panel Indicator LED s Output On SYNC On Power Requirements Mains Input Range Maximum Total Module Power EMC Certification Rear panel BNC 10kQ 5 TTL 50 5 Rear panel BNC 1MQ 5 12V OV to 5V 5Vp p produce 100 modulation External 0 to 100 DC to 500kHz IEEE 488 2 1993 0 1 31 configured via front panel programming Downloads arbitrary waveform data arbitrary FM waveform data and sequence table data DMA support is required by the controller Rear panel RJ 45 female Twisted pair 10 100Base T 10 100 Mbit sec with auto negotiation SCPI commands over TCP IP IP address programmed through USB port Type A receptacle Version 1 0 version 2 0 SCPI commands over USB Color LCD 3 5
216. nd requires that at least one segment be defined for channel B phase will set the leading edge offset between master and slave units Parameter type Numeric integer only Parameter range lt phase gt 0 to 4M in units of waveform points The phase offset can be programmed in increments of 4 points INSTrument COUPle PHASe Response to query version The 397 will return the present phase offset value Default value is 0 5 41 397 User Manual TRIGger Subsystem Keyword Limit ARM SLOPe BREakpoint POSition 7 INITiate CONTinuous TRIGger BURSt 7 COUNt GATE PHASe SLOPe SOURCe ADVance TIMer IMMediate TRG ARM OFF ON O0 1 Purpose The TRIGger subsystem is used to synchronize device actions with external events These commands control the trigger modes of the Model 397 The generator can be placed in Triggered Gated or Burst mode Trigger source is selectable from an external source an internal trigger generator or a software trigger Optional nodes were omitted from these commands Factory defaults after RST are shown in bold typeface Parameter low and high limits are given where app licable Parameter Form OFF ON 0 POSitive position OFF ON O OFF ONJO count OFF ONJ O phase POSitive EXTernal lt interval gt 1 NEGative 1 1 1 NEGative INTernal
217. ne Adjustment 6 26 Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 500 Feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Procedure 1 Modify 397 frequency setting to 1KHz and channel 1 amplitude to 3 161V 2 Modify the DMM setting ACV 20V and connect the front panel CHAN 1 connector to the DMM input Use 500 Feedthrough termination at the DMM side of the BNC cable 3 Note and record the DMM reading 4 Modify 397 amplitude setting to 3 162V 5 Adjust RV9 LIN1 for a DMM reading as was recorded in step 4 10 mV 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 for a few times until the reading is balanced to within 10mV 7 Modify the DMM setting to DCV 8 Repeat the sequence above but this time measuring DC voltage and adjust RV5 ZERO CH until you balance the readings between the two amplitude settings to within 10mV 9 Modify 397 amplitude setting to 1V 10 Adjust RV1 NULL1 for a DMM reading of OV 2mV 11 Modify 397 amplitude setting to 10 V 12 Modify DMM setting to ACV and adjust RV15 AMPL1 for a DMM reading of 3 535V 20mV 13 Modify 397 amplitude setting to 6V 14 Re adjust RV15 AMPL1 for a DMM reading of 2 121V 10 mV 15 Repeat the sequence above from 11 through 14 until you balance the readings between 10V and 6V settings to within 10mV Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 500 Feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Procedure 1 2 gue o Modify 397 channel 1 amplitude setting to 1V and offset to
218. nel are explained below PS The Parameters group has two parameters for each channel Amplitude and Offset To access the required parameter click on the LED or the text next to it to display the required parameter The value that is associated with the lit LED is displayed on the digital display You can use the dial keyboard or the 1 H keys to adjust the readout to the required setting After you modify the reading press Execute to update the 397 with the new reading Nj Note Normal color of the digital reading is dark blue If you modify the reading the color changes to a lighter shade of blue indicating that the 397 has not been updated yet 4 8 Waveforms Run Mode SYNC Output Output ArbExplorer The Control Panels with the new parameter Pressing Execute will update the instrument and will restore the color of the digital readout to dark blue indicating that the displayed value is the same as the generator setting Also note that the digital readout has an autodetect mechanism for the high and low limits You cannot exceed the limits if you are using the dial but only if you use the keypad In case you do the program will not let you download an illegal parameter and you ll be requested to correct your setting The Waveforms group is used for selecting between waveform types The 397 provides three types of waveforms Standard Arbitrary and Sequenced By pressing one of these buttons output waveform wil
219. nent for the standard exponential waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms e exp gt sets the exponent parameter Parameter type Numeric Parameter range exp 100 to 100 EXPonential EXPonent Response and default The 397 will return the present exponent value Default value is 20 DC 9 s amplitude Purpose This command programs the amplitude of the standard DC waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms e lt _ amplitude gt sets the dc level as percentage of the programmed amplitude setting Parameter type Numeric Parameter range 9o amplitude 100 to 100 in units of percent DC Response and default The 397 will return the present dc value Default value is 100 5 36 Remote Programming Reference OUTPut Subsystem OUTPut This subsystem controls the characteristics of the output It controls Sub filter type and filter cutoff frequency It is also used to control the u system sync output source and position Optional nodes were omitted from these commands Factory defaults after RST are shown in bold typeface Parameter low and high limits are given where applicable Keyword Parameter Form Default Low Limit High Limit OUTPut 2 OFF ON 0 1 OFF FILTer NONE 25M 50M ALL NONE SYNC OFF ON 0 1 OFF SOURce BIT LCOMplete BIT POSition lt position gt 0 0 4M WIDTh lt width gt 4 4 100000 OUTPut OFF ON J0 1 Purpose Th
220. nent values are enough to cause skew These factors were known during the design phase and were minimized as practical On the other hand skew can also be generated from external factors that are controlled by the user alone Examples for these factors are variation in cable length and quality as well as non symmetrical end termination Therefore if you want to eliminate skew between channels you have to use exactly the same cable type the same cable length and the same termination on both channels There are times however that you do need to offset phase between channels In that case the 397 lets you adjust phase offset variations with resolution of one point When you do just keep in mind that the initial skew will escort your programmed phase offset throughout the entire phase offset range 3 49 397 User Manual 3 50 Output OFF Filter NONE Offset Channel 2 Divider 1 CH 2 gt CH 1 MOT BASE MODE SYNC OUT ARM OFF Notice that phase offset resolution is given in points not degrees This is because the 397 can generate arbitrary waveforms that you download from an external application After you download waveforms there is no way for the instrument to determine phase because all it has is just number of points and no further knowledge of the shape of your waveform If you insist you can convert points to degrees on your waveform from the following equation Phase in Phase point x 360 nu
221. nloaded using the FM wave composer There are applications requiring more than 2 synchronized channels at time even 10 channels Synchronization between completely independent free running instruments is not an easy task Besides distribution of the sample clock to all instruments each instrument has to be told when to start generating waveforms so that all start at the same point and with the same phase Triggering multiple instruments to achieve synchronization is not enough because it will generate a jitter of 1 count Multi instrument synchronization is built into the 397 where special connectors and cables were designed to eliminate jitter and to provide start phase control There is not limit to the number of 397 s that can be daisy chained multiple instrument synchronization is Remote Control Safety Considerations Supplied Accessories Specifications Functional Description Getting Started 1 Safety Considerations built into each instrument The 397 must be programmed to generate waveforms Therefore it is recommended that the user becomes familiar with its basic features functions and programming concepts as described in this and the following chapters The instrument has been manufactured according to international safety standards The instrument meets EN61010 VDE 0411 03 81 and UL 1244 standards for safety of commercial electronic measuring and test equipment for instruments with an exposed metal chassis
222. nstalling interface adapters in your computer will not be described in this manual since the installation procedures for these adapters GPIB Connection USB Connection LAN Connection Selecting a Remote interface Configuring the Instrument 2 Selecting a Remote interface change frequently You must follow the instructions supplied with your particular adapter Before proceed with the remote interface installation install an adapter card and follow the instructions in the following paragraphs Direct connection between a host computer and a single device with GPIB is not recommended since GPIB adapter is usually expensive and is not really required for direct connection Use GPIB connection in cases where download speed is critical to the system or when you already have GPIB system in place and you are adding the 397 as a GPIB device The GPIB port is connected with a special 24 wire cable Refer interconnection issues to your GPIB supplier After you connect the 397 to the GPIB port proceed to the GPIB Configuration section in this chapter for instructions how to select a GPIB address Direct connection between a single host computer and a single device with USB is most recommended as this does not require any specific considerations and device configuration Just connect your Fluke 397 to your PC using a standard USB cable and the interface will self configure After you connect the 397 to the USB port proceed to the USB Configur
223. nt Setting viii iia 6 25 Adjustment PrOGeOUEes e acu EE 6 25 DDS Duty Cycle Adj stmaenit eco eretuo e cesado 6 25 Sine Out Offset Adjustment cere tenete erue et weasel uranio eg euin ns 6 25 TCXO Frequency Adjustrmierit c n e aeree S abe Hg De EENS 6 25 Channel 1 Amplitude and Balance Acdiustment nenne 6 26 Channel 1 Offset Fine Adiustmment 6 26 Channel 1 Offset Adlustmment nennt 6 27 Channel 2 Amplitude and Balance Acdiustment 6 27 Channel 2 Offset Fine Adiustmment tennt 6 28 vi Contents continued Channel 2 Offset Adjustment oooooooccccccccccoococcccccnnncnnnnonnnanccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannznnnnos 6 28 Updating 397 Firmware esses nennen nennen enne en nennen nnns 6 29 Appendices A Specifications EE A 1 vii List of Tables Chapter Title Page 2 1 Valid and Invalid IP Addresses for Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 sss 2 16 3 1 Default Conditions After Reset rere be ore eter ge Een trenta eben Pep Rene 5 3 32 Front Pane Mens tita bib qu Ht o ode ii 7 3 3 3 Front Panel Menus continue 8 3 5 1 Model 397 SCPI Commands List Summary oononconnnoccnnnnnnnnnnonncccconennnnnnnnnnencnnnnnnnnnnnnnanaas 5 8 6 1 Recommended Test Eoupment trett trenn nnen nE EEEE EEEE EE AEAEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EE EEEE EEEa 6 6 6 27 FREQUENCY Te EE 6 7 6 3 Frequency Accuracy Using External 10MHz Reference ooooocooonccccncccccccconancnnncnnnccnnnnnnns 6 7 6 4 AMPpltUdO ACCURACY ce 6 8 0 5 Offset ACCURAC
224. nt to the required interface option then press Enter The new interface will Initialize and the icon at the top will be updated and will flag the active interface 2 7 397 User Manual 2 8 o 00000 GPIB Configuration BASE E KC o TR ER EXT FUNC ARB TYPE BIT 11 START Pt 0 RUN TRIG POSITION SLOPE POSITIVE option The interface icon is always displayed at the top of the screen so if you are not sure which of the interfaces is selected compare the following icons to what you have on the screen Designates GPIB interface is selected and active GPIB configuration is required to communicate with your PC Designates USB interface is selected and active First connection requires USB configuration and software driver installation to communicate with your PC Designates LAN interface is selected and active LAN configuration is required to communicate with your PC LUKE 397 WAVEFORM GENERATOR cnt oe foureur nm comal Physical Address 00 C0 17 41 00 00 e FL397 PROT LL ES 255 255 255 o c exu OOO Ge Check with your A un SUI SLES Or Soa ree Se MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG Ke a Xu 4 Na m AO A Figure 2 1 Selecting a Remote interface GPIB configuration requires an address setting only If you intend to use more than one instrument on the bus you have to make sure each device has a unique address setting GPIB address is programmed from the front panel Utility menu as shown in Figu
225. nto ld 5 37 INS Trum nt SUBS SUSI aii A A AA A AAA 5 40 TRIGGer SUDSY SUS Mesias 5 42 TRACE SUIS Slide api 5 47 SY STem Su ubsyste Mna EE 5 57 IEEE STD 488 2 Common Commands and Queries occccccccccccnoconoconcncncccnnnananoncnnnnncnnnnnnos 5 58 The SCPI Status Redislers ee m eoe eee o RE ERE n ER EE 5 59 The Status Byte Register S TB asus eris dis 5 60 Reading the Status Byte Register 5 62 Clearing the Status Byte Register eese 5 62 Service Request Enable Register GE 5 62 5 1 397 User Manual Standard Event Status Register ESR ooooconcoccocococcoconnononcononnononnonononnonrononnoncnnoncnnnnoo Standard Event Status Enable Register EE Error MESSAGES toi ii 5 2 What s In This Chapter Introduction To SCPI Remote Programming Reference What s In This Chapter This Chapter lists and describes the set of SCPI compatible Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments remote commands used to operate the 397 To provide familiar formatting for users who have previously used the SCPI reference documentation the command descriptions are dealt with in a similar manner In particular each sub system s documentation starts with a short description followed by a table showing the complete set of commands in the sub system finally the effects of individual keywords and parameters are described Complete listing of all commands used for programming the 397 is given in Table 5 1 Commands to program
226. nvoke ArbExplorer by double clicking on the icon If you cannot find the icon on your desktop click on Start Programs and ArbExplorer The opening screen will show If you installed the program correctly your screen should look as shown in Figure 4 1 Communications Setup Interface Startup Options Specify an Address ivi GPIB Communicate Only JETHERNET C Previous Session Setup USB C Reset Instrument amp Panels Detect Automatically C Work Offline Model Here Ade D Store mode and don t show this box at startup CEPR ccn Cancel Figure 4 1 Startup amp Communication Options The Startup amp Communication Options dialog box is displayed You can check the Store and don t show so next time you invoke ArbExplorer this dialog box will not be displayed The purpose of this dialog box is to update the program in the way you intend to use it For example if you are using a GPIB device that has address 4 you can click on the Specify an Address option and type in the required address so the next time you use ArbExplorer the program will automatically resume communication with the same address as was originally detected If you chose to hide this dialog box you can still access and change the options from the System command at the top of the screen Make your selection and click OK The Startup amp Communication Updater dialog box will be removed from the screen And the M
227. o 125MHz ECL 100K compatible Sample clock can be frequency modulated by internal waveforms that are resident in internal memory fixed waveforms Internal sine square triangle and ramp 1mHz to 100kHz 9 digits 0 1 lt 0 1 100mS s to 125MS s Automatic triggered gated or software command Same as SYNC output Programmable for selected frequency FM Downloaded Arbitrary Waveforms A 2 Description Modulation Source Modulation Sample Clock Range Resolution Accuracy Modulating Frequency Distortion Sample Clock Deviation Range Advance Marker Output and Level Position Waveform Download Sample clock can be frequency modulated arbitrary waveforms that are downloaded by the user user waveforms User waveform any shape 10 to 20000 waveform points 1mS s to 2MS s 9 digits 0 1 lt 0 1 100mS s to 125MS s Automatic triggered gated or software command Same as SYNC output Programmable for selected frequency Through USB ENET or DMA channel through GPIB FSK Description Carrier Sample Clock Range FSK Source External Frequency Range FSK Delay Ramped FSK Description Ramp Time Range Sweep Description Type Direction Range Time Advance Marker Output and Level Position OPERATING MODES Normal Triggered Gated External Burst Internal Burst Trigger Sources External Input Level Slope Sensitivity Frequency Internal Range Resolution Accuracy Software A
228. o 2048 16 points 4 All trace lengths must be multiples of 4 14 bits 16 384 points Through USB ENET or DMA channel through GPIB Sine wave performance is measured using the maximum sample clock rate at 5Vp p the maximum amplitude resolution of the DAC 14 bit and without filters Spectrum analyzer settings Start frequency OMHz stop frequency 50MHz Nyquist frequency 0 196 to 100 KHz lt 55dBc for carrier frequencies lt 1MHz lt 40dBc for carrier frequencies lt 6MHz lt 35dBc for carrier frequencies lt 10MHz lt 22dBc for carrier frequencies lt 50MHz SEQUENCED ARBITRARY WAVEFORMS Operation Advance Modes Automatic Sequence Advance Stepped Sequence Advance Permits division of the memory bank into smaller segments Segments may be linked and repeated in user selectable fashion to generate extremely long waveforms No triggers required to step from one segment to the next Sequence is repeated continuously through a pre programmed sequence table Current segment is sampled continuously external trigger advances to next programmed segment Control input is TRIG IN connector 397 User Manual Single Sequence Advance Mixed Sequence Advance Advance Source Sequencer steps Segment loops Segment Duration OUTPUTS Channels 1 and 2 Output Connector Stand by Impedance Protection Amplitude Range Resolution Accuracy 1 KHz Offset Offset Range Resolution Accuracy Filters
229. o command undoes the last editing operation View Commands The View commands have commands that let you view various sections of the waveform area The View commands include Zoom In Zoom Out Hide Show Toolbars and Channel Y waveforms Description of the view commands is given in the following Zoom In The zoom in command operates between anchors Anchors are marked as left and right hand triangles The default position of the anchors is the start and the end of the waveform To move an anchor to a new location click and hold on the triangle and drag the anchor to left or right as required If you move the left anchor to the right and the right anchor to the left the area between the anchors will zoom in as you select this command Looking at the Waveform Map as shown in Figure 4 17 you ll see that the white portion is the zoomed area Click and hold on the white area and move your cursor around and the waveform screen will be updated accordingly While zoomed in you can perform Autoline and sketch editing or zoom in further by clicking and holding the mouse at one corner and releasing the mouse button at the other corner Zoom Out The zoom out restores the screen to display the complete waveform 4 33 397 User Manual Waveform Map Figure 4 17 Zooming In on Waveform Segments Channel 1 The Channel 1 Waveform command updates the waveform screen with the Channel 1 waveform If you have not yet generated a waveform f
230. oad complex pulses you can check the Force pulse to one segment option and the 397 will do some extra muscle flexing to fit the pulse as required To launch the pulse composer point and click on the PULSE button in the Panels bar Figure 4 30 shows an example of the pulse composer The Pulse Composer has main sections Commands bar Toolbar and Waveform screen Refer to Figure 4 30 throughout the description of these sections 4 54 To be continued Chapter 5 Remote Programming Reference Title Page What s In MR El le E 5 3 Introduction TO SOPA an Ee ERANT RR AER A FERE RR 5 3 COMMANG FOrMAl Meiie Em 5 4 Command Geparator tttesA EEEE EEEEESSAEEEEEEEEEES EErEE EEnn Ennn EEEE 5 4 The MIN and MAX Darameterg enne nnns 5 5 Querying Parameter Setting eo see ped dar eov dtu ores Se E p et ede ule 5 5 Query Response Format niei ode agitar teda ba E Mg Duka ide 5 5 SCPI Command Terminator ccoooooonncccnnncccnnonnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnaniss 5 5 IEEE STD 488 2 Common Commands cooooocccnnnnccnnnonnnoncnnnnnnnnnnancnnnnnnnnnnnnnannncnnninnnnnns 5 5 EI Bu ee 5 6 Numeric Parameter 5 6 Discrete Parameters ssrin eE eK Epa aia 5 6 Boolean PDarameters nnne nennen rh renes nnns rrr 5 6 Arbitrary Block Parameters s c sioe peii od iaa iet be Shed oat Ete sitae 5 7 Binary BIOCKPSrametersd oie RM ei eL Eas 5 7 SGPESyntax and E EE 5 7 SOURCE Subsysterm tee rete sane as 5 14 OUTP t SUD SOM rete
231. oading data to the arbitrary FM waveform memory is very different than loading arbitrary waveform data Waveform data programs amplitude domain therefore every point programs an amplitude level On the other hand FM modulating waveform data programs frequency domain therefore every point sets different sample clock frequency The FM modulating waveform data is made of 40 bit words However the GPIB link has 8 data bas lines and accepts 8 bit words only Therefore the data has to be prepared 5 21 397 User Manual as 40 bit words and rearranged as five 8 bit words before it can be used by the 397 as FM modulating waveform data There are a number of points you should be aware of before you start preparing the data 1 The FM function is shared by both channels The number of bytes in a complete FM modulating waveform data must divide by 5 The Model 397 has no control over data sent to its FM waveform during data transfer Therefore wrong data and or incorrect number of bytes will cause errors 3 The LSBit on the last byte sets marker position 0 sets no marker and 1 sets marker You can set as many markers as you want 4 The SYNC output serves as marker output when you have the 397 set to operate in FM mode Normal SYNC level is TTL low The SYNC output is set to TTL high when the marker bit is true This way you can use the SYNC output to mark frequency occurrences during FM operation 5 Data download is terminated with the
232. ock frequency at the stop point is computed using the following equation Fstop 100Pts x 25KHz 2 5MS s 5 Press Stop Sample CIk soft key and program the value to 2 5Ms s Press Enter to lock in the new value 6 Select and press the Sweep Time soft key and program the sweep time parameter to 10ns Press Enter to lock in the new parameter value If you did not make any programming errors the front panel outputs will generate linearly swept waveforms from 100Hz to 25kHz in 10ms We ll now check the results at the rear panel sine output connector and compare what we get there to what we see on the front panel 3 47 397 User Manual AM 3 48 Remove the cable from the main output connector and connect to the rear panel SINE OUT connector Here is what you should expect to see when you check this output Carrier waveform is sine wave having fixed amplitude level of 1V into 500 The waveform is swept from 10kHz to 2 5MHz in 10ms Sweep step is linear Amplitude modulation unlike frequency modulation is not digital Modulating waveform must be applied to a rear panel connector to modulate the 397 outputs Amplitude modulation control is separate for each channel so you can amplitude modulate one channel without affecting the other Before using the AM function you should get yourself familiar with some of the terms Carrier This term represents the modulated waveform before modulating signal has been applied The car
233. ode AM ON Output On Test Procedure 1 Verify AM operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Amplitude Modulated Sine Modulation Depth 100 10 Test Results Pass Fail 2 Remove the cable from 397 channel 1 and connect to chan 2 3 Repeat the test procedure as above for channel 2 Test Results Pass Fail 6 23 397 User Manual Adjustments Introduction Description Environmental Conditions Required Equipment Instrument DMM This document contains the calibration procedure for the 1250MS s dual channel Universal Waveform Generator Model 397 A list of specifications is given in Appendix A of the Operations Manual The calibration procedures that are described in this document are for use by qualified service personnel only Do not perform these procedures unless qualified to do so This procedure is intended to be used once before complete and final performance verification to verify that the 397 meets or exceeds its published specifications The 397 is a bench type instrument The output can generate a standard set of waveforms These waveforms include Sine Triangle Square Pulse Ramp Sinc Gaussian Exponential Decaying Rising Pulse Noise and DC Arbitrary waveforms are generated by downloading data to memory Large waveform memories are provided so that multiple waveforms can be loaded at once Powerful sequencing all
234. ol features sequence table generator FM composer and many other features that will be described separately To generate a sequence you must first download waveforms to the instrument generate a sequence table and download the sequence table to the instrument Sequences are generated easily using the waveform Studio as shown in Figure 3 18 Note that different sequences can be generated for each channel Detailed information on the structure of the arbitrary waveform and the commands that are needed to download arbitrary waveforms to the 397 is given in Chapter 5 There you can also find information how to create and download sequence tables using SCPI programming commands Information in this chapter will give you some general idea what sequenced waveforms are all about m Sequence table _File name Append Lenath Link Seg Loops Adv Mapped C ArbE xplorer MotsT em 1 wa Eg 305 3 0 2 2 23 0 3 H 2 0 1024 Delete Channel 1 Channel 2 Download E 1 Om Waveform Shape segment 1 Figure 3 18 Using ArbExplorer to Generate Sequences 3 26 Using the Instrument Generating Sequenced Waveforms What Are Sequenced Sequenced waveforms are constructed from two or more arbitrary 2 waveforms which are linked and looped in any way you can Waveforms imagine as long as you observe the limitations set forth in the specification section o
235. ons 1 9 pin master slave cable must be connected between the instruments The Master end of the cable connected to the master unit and the slave end of the cable connected to the slave unit 2 The SCLK OUT connector from the master unit is connected to the SCLK IN on the slave unit 3 The master unit is selected as master and the slave unit is selected as slave 4 The command is sent from the master unit only ONor1 will set the couple mode on e OFF or 0 will set the couple mode off Parameter type Discrete 5 40 Remote Programming Reference D INSTrument Subsystem INSTrument COUPIe Response and default The 397 will return 0 or 1 depending on the present instrument couple setting Default value is 0 INSTrument COUPle MODE MASTer SLAVe Purpose This command will select master and slave instruments in multi instrument synchronization mode Note that only one instrument in a chain may be set as master All other instruments must be set as slaves e MASTer will set the master instrument e SLAVe will set the slave instrument Parameter type Discrete INSTrument COUPle MODE Response and default The 397 will return MAST or SLAV depending on the present instrument couple setting Default value is MAST INSTrument COUPle PHASe lt phase gt Purpose This command will program the phase offset between master and slave units This command has no effect on the instrument in modes other than instrument couple The phase comma
236. or channel 1 the waveform screen will show a dc level at vertical point 0 Channel 2 The Channel 2 command updates the waveform screen with the Channel 2 waveform If you have not yet generated a waveform for channel 2 the waveform screen will show a dc level at vertical point 0 4 34 ArbExplorer The Wave Composer Wave Commands The Wave commands let you create waveforms on the screen The Wave command has a library of 8 waveforms Sine Sawtooth Square Sinc Gaussian Exponent Pulse and Noise It also lets you create waveforms using the Equation Editor Information how to create waveforms using the Wave commands is given below Creating Waveforms From the Built in Library You can create any waveform from the built in library using the Wave command Clicking on one of the Wave options will open a dialog box An example of the Sine waveform dialog box is shown in Figure 4 18 This dialog box is representative of the rest of the waveforms so other waveforms will not be described Creating Sine Waveforms Use the following procedure to create sine waveforms from the built in library Click on Wave then sine the dialog box as shown in Figure 4 18 will appear You can now start programming parameters that are available in this box Start Point Defines the first point where the created wave will start Note that if you change the start point the left anchor will automatically adjust itself to the selected start point T
237. orer The Control Panels Looking at the panel you can identify the following controls Push buttons LED s radio buttons Dial and Digital display The function of each control is described below Push Buttons These are used for toggling a function on and off For example the Output Enable button in the Output group toggles the output on and off The first mouse click will push the button inwards and will turn on a red bar at the center of the button indicating that the function is on The second mouse click will turn the function off Radio Buttons Are used for changing operating modes or selecting between mode options One of the radio buttons is always on with a red dot in its center indicating its state condition LED s The LED s indicate which of the parameters are displayed on the Digital Display Red LED indicates that the parameter name next to this LED is selected Only one LED can be ON at a time Y HINT LED s are turned on by clicking on the LED or the text next to it The selected parameter is flagged by a darker LED shade Dial Use the dial to modify displayed reading To use the dial press and hold the mouse cursor on the dial and move the mouse in a clockwise circle to increase the number or counterclockwise circle to decrease the displayed number The dial modifies digits at the cursor position and will allow modification within the legal range of the displayed parameter If you reach the end of
238. orms you should multiply p by 10 Try this Amplitude p 28000 sin omg p 10 So far you have learned how to create two simple waveforms straight lines and trigonometric functions Lets see if we can combine these waveforms to something more interesting Take the straight line equation and add it to the sinewave equation Amplitude p 3000 sin omg p I0 8 p 4000 Press Preview Your screen should look like Figure 4 24 4 47 397 User Manual 4 48 L Anchor 0 it x 3000 sinfomg p 10 8 p 4000 Em 1023 o Points Figure 4 24 An Equation Editor Example Now let s try to modulate two sine waves with different periods and different start phase Type this Amplitude p 8000 sin omg p cos omg p 30 Press Preview Your screen should look like Figure 4 25 ArbExplorerO 4 51 Figure 4 25 Using the Equation Editor to Modulate Sine Waveforms In the following example as shown in Figure 4 29 2096 second harmonic distortion has been added to a standard sinewave The original waveform had a peak to peak value of 6000 points so 2096 second harmonic is equivalent to 4000 points The frequency of the second harmonic is obviously double that of the fundamental so term 1200 sin 2 omg p is added to the original sine wave equation Use the following equation Amplitude p 6000 sin omg p 1200 sine 2 omg p Press Preview Your screen should
239. our carrier frequency will swing from 5 MS s to 45MS s Carrier Sample CIk This is the frequency of the sample clock as programmed and displayed on the screen In the case of 397 the sample clock signal is equivalent to the carrier waveform frequency This is the value that will be modulated and not the frequency of the waveform as generated at the front panel output connector Direct output of the sample clock frequency is available at the rear panel SINE OUT connector Modulation Run mode Defines the run mode for the modulated waveforms only Note that run modes are not the same for modulated and non modulated waveforms The difference is as follows When the 397 generates Standard Arbitrary or Sequenced waveforms and removed from continuous run mode the output idles on a dc level until a valid trigger initiates an output cycle On the other hand when the 397 generates a modulated waveform modulation is generated continuously when the generator is placed in Continuous run mode however when placed in trigger burst or gate run modes the output generates continuous carrier waveform until a valid trigger signal is received If only one trigger is issued the 397 generates a single modulation cycle and resumes to output continuous carrier waveform only Y Tip Use the arrow keys or the dial to scroll through the FM parameters The Modulation Type option will remain at the top while the others may be accessed selectively Three ex
240. ows the waveform segments to be generated in any order Communicating with the 397 is done via ENET USB or GPIB The 397 can operate from 0 C to 50 C Calibration should be performed under laboratory conditions having an ambient temperature of 25 C 5 C and at relative humidity of less than 80 Turn on the power to the 397 and allow it to warm up for at least 30 minutes before beginning the adjustment procedure If the instrument has been subjected to conditions outside these ranges allow at least one additional hour for the instrument to stabilize before beginning the adjustment procedure Recommended equipment for calibration is listed in Table 6 12 Instruments other than those listed may be used only if their specifications equal or exceed the required minimal characteristics Also listed below are accessories required for calibration Table 6 13 Required Equipment Manufacturer Model Keithley 2000 Oscilloscope LeCroy LT342 10MHz Reference Oscilloqurz 10MHz Counter Timer Tabor 6030 Accessories BNC to BNC cable 500 Feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter 6 24 500 probe Initial Instrument Setting Adjustment Procedures DDS Duty Cycle Adjustment Sine Out Offset Adjustment TCXO Frequency Adjustment Maintenance and Performance Checks Initial Instrument Setting To avoid confusion as to what initial setting is to be used for each calibration it
241. p CH1 CH2 nt 5MHz 40dBc 1M 1M 10M 2 Remove the cables from the front panel outputs and connect one cable to the rear panel SINE OUT connector 3 Change function shape to arbitrary and perform rear panel spectral purity tests using Table 6 9 Table 6 10 Rear Panel Sine wave Spectral Purity Test e Reading Limits ron SCLKFreq Reading Limits Start Stop Rear Panel Out 5MHz gt 45dBc 6 11 397 User Manual Trigger Operation Trigger Gate and Equipment Oscilloscope function generator counter Burst f Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Termination 20dB 50Q feedthrough attenuator Setup As required for the test 2 Connect 397 Channel 1 2 outputs to the oscilloscope input Place the feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope inputs 3 Configure the function generator as follows Frequency 1kHz Run Mode As required by the test Wave TTL level Square from the main output 4 Connect the function generator output to the 397 TRIG IN connector 5 Configure the 397 channels 1 2 as follows Reset Frequency 1 5625MHz Burst Count 1066 counts each channel Internal Trigger 1ms Amplitude 5V Output On Test Procedure 1 Perform trigger and gate tests using Tables 6 10 2 Configure the counter to TOTB Measurements and perform burst tests using Tables 6 10 Table 6 11 Trigger gate and burst Characteristics 397 Setting External Trigger Signal Osc
242. plete bit bit 0 in the Standard Event register after the previous commands have been executed OPC Returns 1 to the output buffer after all the previous commands have been executed OPC is used for synchronization between a controller and the instrument using the MAV bit in the Status Byte or a read of the Output Queue The OPC query does not affect the OPC Event bit in the Standard Event Status Register ESR Reading the response to the OPC query has the advantage of removing the complication of dealing with service requests and multiple polls to the instrument However both the system bus and the controller handshake are in a temporary hold off state while the The SCPI Status Registers Remote Programming Reference IEEE STD 488 2 Common Commands and Queries controller is waiting to read the OPC query response OPT Returns the value 0 for a 397 with no options RST Resets the generator to its default state Default values are listed in Table 4 1 SRE enable value Enables bits in the Status Byte enable register SRE Query the Status Byte enable register The generator returns a decimal value in the range of O to 63 or 128 to 191 since bit 6 RSQ cannot be set The binary weighted sum of the number represents the value of the bits of the Service Request enable register STB Query the Status Byte summary register The STB command is similar to a serial poll but is processed like any ot
243. ponse and default The 397 will return the present rise time value Default value is 60 RAMP TRANsition TRAiling lt fall gt Purpose This command programs ramp transition from high to low of the standard ramp waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms lt fall gt sets the fall time parameter Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt fall gt 0 to 99 9 in units of percent RAMP TRANsition TRAiling Response and default The 397 will return the present fall time value Default value is 30 SINC NCYCIeN cycles Purpose This command programs the number of 0 crossings of the standard SINC pulse waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms N cycle sets the number of zero crossings parameter Parameter type Numeric integer only Parameter range N cycle 4 to 100 zero crossings SINC NCYCle Response and default The 397 will return the present number of zero crossing value Default value is 10 GAUSsian EXPonent lt exp gt Purpose This command programs the exponent for the standard gaussian pulse waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms exp gt sets the exponent parameter Parameter type Numeric Parameter range exp 10 to 200 5 35 397 User Manual GAUSsian EXPonent Response and default The 397 will return the present exponent value Default value is 20 EXPonential EXPonent lt exp gt Purpose This command programs the expo
244. pose This command will download FM modulating waveform data in binary download Using this command Arbitrary FM waveform table data is loaded to the 397 using high speed binary transfer in a similar way to downloading waveform data with the trace command High speed binary transfer allows any 8 bit bytes including extended ASCII code to be transmitted in a message FM DATA 3100 lt binary block This command causes the transfer of 10 bytes of data to the arbitrary FM waveform memory The header is interpreted this way e The ASCII 23 designates the start of the binary data block e 3 designates the number of digits that follow e 100 is the number of bytes to follow This number must divide by 5 The generator accepts binary data as 40 bit integers which are sent in five byte words Therefore the total number of bytes is always five times the number of arbitrary FM waveform points For example 100 bytes are required to download 20 arbitrary FM waveform points The IEEE STD 488 2 definition of Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data format is demonstrated in Figure 5 1 refer to the TRACe subsystem The transfer of definite length arbitrary block data must terminate with the EOI bit set This way Carriage return CR OdH and line feed LF OaH characters can be used as sequence data and will not cause unexpected termination of the arbitrary block data binary block Represents arbitrary FM waveform data Downl
245. ppendices A Specifications Current segment is sampled continuously External low TTL level programs carrier sample clock external high TTL level programs shifted sample clock frequency FSK operates in user shape arbitrary waveforms only 100mS s to 125MS s Rear panel Trigger input BNC Low level carrier sample clock High level hop frequency From 10MHz to DC Minimum 1 waveform cycle 50ns Same as FSK except carrier sample clock ramps to shifted frequency at a rate defined by the ramp time parameter External low TTL level programs carrier sample clock external high TTL level programs shifted frequency 10us to 1s 3 digits 0 1 Sample Clock sweeps continuously from start to stop at a rate defined by the sweep time More complex sweep modes and types can be generated using the FM mode in conjunction with the FM composer program Linear or logarithmic Up or down depending on the start and stop setting 100mS s to 125MS s 1 ms to 1000s 9 digits 0 1 Automatic triggered gated or software command Same as SYNC output Programmable for selected frequency Continuous waveform is generated Each input cycle generates a single output cycle External signal enables generator First output cycle synchronous with the active slope of the triggering signal Last cycle of output waveform always completed Preset number from 1 to 1M cycles stimulated by an external or manual trigger This mode is not available in SEQ mode
246. pt the frequency must be computed from the sample clock and the number of points that generate the output waveform Confusing Yes a bit but some examples below will remove your confusion When you select the FM modulation the parameters as shown in Figure 3 23 and described in the following paragraphs will be available for modification Modulation Shape Defines the shape and type of the modulating waveform Although there are 5 options shown in the menu there is a significant difference between the first four Sine Triangle Square and Ramp and the last option Arbitrary The two types are described below 3 33 397 User Manual 3 34 mem Modulation Shape E 1 Triangle Square Ramp Arbitrary i y pron 18 888 888 GHz Sample Clk Deviation ARRIER SED BRSE MODE SYNC OUT FUNC MOD TYPE BIT 1 RUN CONT POSITION O Figure 3 23 FM Modulation Parameters Sine Triangle Square and Ramp are built in waveforms that modulate the carrier sample clock frequency with know and pre defined parameters Throughout the description in this manual this modulation type will be referred to as Standard FM Mode Arbitrary is a special case of modulating waveform where the waveform is not actually resident in the instrument until downloaded from a remote interface to a special and dedicated modulating waveform memory You may create and download the modulating waveform using external utilities such as
247. r1 will set the SYNC output on OFF or O will set the SYNC output off Parameter type Discrete OUTPut SYNC Response and default The 397 will return 1 if the SYNC output is on or 0 if the SYNC output is off Default value is OFF OUTPut SYNC SOURce BIT LCOMplete Purpose This command will select the 397 SYNC option BIT will set the SYNC to output a narrow pulse e LCOMplete wil set the SYNC to transition high at the beginning of the sequence and low a the end of the sequence Parameter type Discrete OUTPut SYNC SOURce Response and default The 397 will return BIT or LCOM depending on the present setting of the SYNC source Default value is BIT OUTPut SYNC POSition lt position gt Purpose This command will program the 397 SYNC position This command is active in arbitrary USER mode only The SYNC position is programmable per channel e position will set the SYNC position in waveform points Parameter type Numeric integer only 5 38 Remote Programming Reference OUTPut Subsystem Parameter range lt position gt 0 to 4M in units of waveform points The sync position can be programmed in increments of 4 points minimum OUTPut SYNC POSition Response and default The 397 will return the present SYNC position value Default value is 0 OUTPut SYNC WIDTh lt width gt Purpose This command will program the width of the SYNC pulse The sync width can be varied through a limited range to allow widening of th
248. ransition occurs at the trigger input the 397 generates preprogrammed number of waveform cycles At the end of the burst the output resumes position at a DC level equal to the last point of the waveform The burst count is programmable from 1 to 1 million cycles There are four parameters you can adjust for this mode Advance Source Defines the trigger source External enables the trigger input Internal disables the trigger input and enables an internal free running trigger generator that automatically triggers the output at programmable intervals Slope Defines edge sensitivity for the trigger input Timer Set the intervals for the internal trigger generator This value is accessible only if you are using the internal trigger generator as the trigger source and Burst Count Defines the number of cycles the generator will output after a trigger signal Each channel can be programmed to have a unique burst counter You may use the counted burst mode in conjunction with standard and arbitrary waveforms only Sequenced waveforms can not be used in burst mode The Burst run mode parameters are shown in Figure 3 12 Using the Arm Feature Using the Instrument 3 Selecting a Run Mode Positive Timer 10 000 00kHz BASE MODE SYNC OUT FUNC ARB TYPE BIT 1 RUN BURST POSITION o Figure 3 12 Burst Run Mode Parameters The arm mode operates in conjunction with the continuous run mode only This feature allows yo
249. ration is disabled on the Model 397 Bit 2 Query Error This bit indicates that an attempt is being made to read data from the output queue when no output is either present or pending Bit 3 Device Dependent Error This bit is set when an error in a device function occurs For example the following command will cause a DDE error VOLTage 5 VOLTage OFFSet 2 Both of the above parameters are legal and within the specified limits however the generator is unable to generate such an amplitude and offset combination Bit 4 Execution Error This bit is generated if the parameter following the command is outside of the legal input range of the generator Bit 5 Command Error This bit indicates the generator received a command that was a syntax error or a command that the device does not implement Bit 6 User Request This event bit indicates that one of a set of local controls had been activated This event bit occurs regardless of the remote or local state of the device Bit 7 Power On This bit indicates that the device s power source was cycled since the last time the register was read 5 63 397 User Manual Standard Event Status Enable Register ESE Error Messages 5 64 The Standard Event Status Enable Register allows one or more events in the Standard Event Status Register to be reflected in the ESB summary message bit The Standard Event Status Enable Register is an 8 bit register that enables correspon
250. re 2 2 To access this screen press the TOP menu button then select the Utility soft key and scroll down with the dial to the Remote Setup option and press the Enter key The GPIB soft key will update the display with the GPIB address parameter The default address is 4 To modify the address press the Enter key and use the dial or keypad to select the new address Press Enter for the 397 to accept the new address setting Configuring the Instrument y Selecting a Remote interface Nj Note Configuring your GPIB address setting does not automatically select the GPIB as your active remote interface Setting a remote interface is done from the Select interface menu Information how to select and Interface is given hereinbefore Tw N SEO mere EE gt DEE y Seas CN ECC Ve Figure 2 2 GPIB Configuration Screen USB Configuration The USB requires no front panel configuration parameters Following simple installation steps as shown later just connect your Fluke 397 to your PC using a standard USB cable and the interface will self configure The first time you connect the generator to your PC the new hardware will be detected and the message as shown in Figure 2 3 will appear J Found New Hardware x FLUKE 397 USB Arbitrary Waveform Generator EK LN dat 6 20 PM Figure 2 3 USB Device Detected 2 9 397 User Manual Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you
251. re are four control buttons at the right corner of the dialog box Use the Preview button to preview an image of your equation or use the OK button to place your waveform on the waveform screen and to leave the dialog box on the screen The Default button restores the parameters in the equation editor to their original factory default values The Cancel button will remove the dialog box from the screen and will discard of any waveforms that you previewed with your Equation Editor ArbExplorer 4 Writing Equations The Equation Editor lets you process mathematical expressions and convert them into waveform coordinates As you probably already know waveforms are made of vertical samples The number of samples on your waveform is determined by the wavelength parameter For example if you have 1024 horizontal points your equation will be computed along 1024 points as a function of the vertical scale Each vertical sample is computed separately and placed along the horizontal axis The points are graphically connected to form a uniform and continuous waveform shape however if you zoom in on a waveform line you ll see that the points are connected like a staircase In reality the 397 generates its waveforms exactly as shown on the screen but if the waveform has many horizontal points the steps get smaller and harder to see without magnification Equations are always computed as a function of the vertical Amplitude axis therefore the left sid
252. re can be displayed as shown in Figure 6 1 To access this screen select the TOP menu then select the Utility soft key and scroll down to the System option Press Enter and the screen will show with the system information Check both the Software Version and the Version Date as both should match with the latest release cut oe fourrur sync See Y DODD V ODODE MENU Software Version 0 93D ST Version Date 18 Nov 2004 09 31 Calibration Date Not calibrated Installed Memory 4M Pts per channel Settings Brightness Level Dial Direction Forward BASE MODE T TF SERED EST FUNC ARB TYPE BIT 13 START Pt o RUN TRIG POSITION o SLOPE POSITIVE Figure 6 1 Software Version Screen Nj NOTE Firmware updates are performed with the LAN set as the active interface and with the 397 communicating with the PC through the network 6 29 397 User Manual 6 30 To update the 397 firmware you will have to run the NETConfig utility If you do not have this utility installed on your computer run the installation procedure from the enclosed CD You will not be able to update firmware without the NETConfig utility To invoke this utility complete the following steps 1 Power on your device 2 Click on NETConfig shortcut on the desktop or select Start Programs Tabor Electronics NETConfig NETConfig 1 0 The NETConfig window lists Fluke devices found on your subnet Figure 6
253. re four major elements that you should consider while programming a sequence table They are Link Seg Loops and Adv These terms are explained below Link This parameter defines an index array for the sequence generator When generating sequences the instrument steps though the links in descending order therefore make sure that you enter your waveform segments in exactly the order you would like them at the output Seg This parameter associates waveform segments with links You can use different segments for different links or you can use the same segment for a number of links There are no limitations how you associate links to segments except you cannot program in the sequence table segments that were not defined earlier Loops This parameter define how many times the segment will loop for the selected link For example if you program 2 the waveform will cycle twice through the same segment before transitioning to the next link Adv This parameter flags the advance mode for the specific segment This flag is active when the advance mode is Stepped When set to 0 the sequence will advance through the list automatically until a segment that is flagged 1 is encountered When 1 is encountered the generator will idle on this segment until an external trigger is applied Learn more about the sequence advance modes in Chapter 3 Figure 4 8 shows an example of a 5 step sequence of which the first waveform is made of segment 2
254. requency 1MHz Amplitude 10mV Offset As specified in Table 6 4 Output On Test Procedure 1 Perform Offset Accuracy tests on both channels using Table 6 4 6 8 Maintenance and Performance Checks Recommended Test Equipment Table 6 5 Offset Accuracy DMM Reading 397 Setting Error Limits Square wave Equipment Oscilloscope Characteristics E Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Termination 500 feedthrough at the oscilloscope input Setup As required for the test 1 Connect 397 Channel 1 2 output to the oscilloscope input 2 Configure the 397 channels 1 2 as follows Reset Frequency 1MHz Waveform Square wave Amplitude 5V Output On Test Procedure 1 Perform Square wave Characteristics tests on both channels using Table 6 5 Table 6 6 Square wave Characteristics Tests DMM Reading 397 Setting Error Limits Rise Fall Time lt 7 10 mV Over undershoot lt 7 10 mV 6 9 397 User Manual Sine Wave Characteristics Sine Wave Distortion Equipment Distortion Analyzer ArbExplorer Preparation 1 Connect 397 Channel 1 2 outputs to the distortion analyzer input Use 50Q feedthrough termination at the distortion analyzer input 2 Configure the 397 channels 1 2 as follows Reset SCLK As required by the test Waveform Arbitrary Amplitude 5V Output On Enable On 3 Using ArbExplorer prepare and download the following waveform Wavelength As require
255. requency characteristics for the front panel outputs must be computed FSK In Frequency Shift Keying FSK the output of the 397 hops between two sample clock settings Carrier Frequency and Shifted Frequency Carrier frequency is the value of the sample clock frequency as programmed for the arbitrary waveform Indirectly it is the sample clock that is being automatically set when you select the frequency for the standard waveform FSK control is done from the rear panel FSK IN This input is level sensitive When the FSK IN signal is low the output generates carrier sample clock changing the level to high modifies the output to shifted sample clock FSK effects the sample clock frequency directly and indirectly the frequency of the output waveform If you are just using sine waveforms then we recommend that you use the rear panel SINE OUT waveform Using this output the sample clock and the shifted sample clock frequencies are used as nominal values If you want to use the FSK function from the front panel then you must compute the actual carrier and shifted frequencies in a similar way as was described above for the FM function When you select FSK modulation the parameters as shown in Figure 3 24 and described in the following paragraphs will be available for modification 3 39 397 User Manual 3 40 CH 1 Modulation FSK Type Pamp ES pem Clk Carrier Sample Clk CARRIER STD BRSE MODE SYNC OUT FUNC
256. ress the following soft keys sequence Waveforms gt gt Modulated gt gt Modulation Type FM Note that the default modulating waveform is Sine Leave this option as is for now Later you can practice modifying the modulating waveform to other shapes 2 Select the Freq parameter This parameter sets the frequency of the modulating waveform There is no need to compute and convert this parameter because the frequency is given in units of Hz Use the cursor to point to the digit you want to change and rotate the dial to adjust the modulating frequency to 100Hz 3 Select the Sample CIk deviation parameter This parameter sets the deviation range value Remember that we computed the number of points that the 397 is using for generating 1MHz We need to use this number to program the deviation range We want the front panel output to deviate by 100kHz 50kHz above and 50kHz below the carrier frequency Since the deviation range is controlling sample clock the value that you have to put on the display is 100kHz x 64 6 4MS s Use the keypad and the dial to program the parameter Press Enter and watch the value displayed at the bottom of the screen At this time if you did not make any programming errors the front panel outputs will generate frequency modulated waveforms having carrier frequency of 1MHz deviation frequency of 100kHz and modulating frequency of 100Hz We ll now check the results at the rear panel sine output connector and compare
257. rier could be any type and shape that the 397 can generate Carrier Frequency This term defines the frequency of the carrier waveform In arbitrary waveforms mode the frequency of the output waveform is derived from the sample clock frequency and the number of points used to generate the active waveform segment Envelope Waveform This is the signal that modulates the carrier waveform In the 397 the modulating signal is applied from an external source to the AM IN connector and must have specific amplitude to modulate the 397 correctly Envelope Frequency This term defines the frequency of the modulating waveform The envelope frequency is bandwidth limited so make sure you are within the specified limits before you apply this signal to the AM input connector AM Depth or Modulation Index This term defines how far the external generator can affect the main output signal The depth is usually measured in units if percent The 397 can be amplitude modulated from an external signal only This means that besides the carrier frequency all other parameters are supplied externally by the user Therefore make sure that the signal that you apply to the AM input complies with the specification requirements set forth in Appendix A When you select AM the only parameter you can control is the AM State Each channel has an independent state so make sure that you display the correct channel before you turn on and off the AM function Th
258. rm Position value is ignored when you select LCOM Applying Filters Selecting the SCLK Source and Reference Using the Instrument Applying Filters Width Programs the width of the sync signal as percent of the output period Width resolution is 4 points Width value is ignored when you select LCOM The SYNC parameters are shown in Figure 3 14 The Menu is accessible by selecting the Outputs soft key as shown in Figure 3 3 Two filters are available for each channel These filters have fixed cutoff frequencies of which their properties are specified in Appendix A The built in filters are switched in after the DAC circuit and are used for reducing the noise harmonics and spurious signals above the cutoff frequency More than 1 filter can be applied at any time the effects being additive The built in filters are available for the user in standard arbitrary and sequenced modes The only function where the Model 397 does not allow external control is when standard sinusoidal waveform is selected lay Note The default output function of the generator is the sine waveform The instrument is using filters to generate this waveform therefore the state of the filters can not be changed until another output function is selected A setting conflict error will occur if one attempts to change the filter state before changing to another output function If you do not plan on using the filters make sure that you leave the sel
259. rn the present start phase value Default value is 0 SQUare DCYCle lt duty_cycle gt Purpose This command programs duty cycle of the standard square waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms duty cycle sets the duty cycle value Parameter type Numeric Parameter range duty cycle 0 to 99 in units of percent 5 32 Remote Programming Reference SOURce Subsystem SQUare DCYCle Response and default The 397 will return the present duty cycle value Default value is 50 PULSe DELay lt delay gt Purpose This command programs delay of the standard pulse waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms delay sets the delay parameter Parameter type Numeric Parameter range delay 0 to 99 9 in units of percent PULSe DELay Response and default The 397 will return the present delay value Default value is 10 PULSe WIDTh pulse width Purpose This command programs pulse high portion of the standard pulse waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms pulse width sets the high time parameter Parameter type Numeric Parameter range pulse width 0 to 99 9 in units of percent PULSe WIDTh Response and default The 397 will return the present width value Default value is 10 PULSe TRANsition lt rise gt Purpose This command programs pulse transition from low to high of the standard pulse waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary wavefor
260. rocedure to modify the parameters that are associated with the arbitrary waveform function 1 Press the soft key next to the required parameter to display the edit field 2 Punch in the value using the numeric keypad Be careful not to exceed parameter limits while you key the numbers 3 Select and press a suffix 4 Press Enter to lock in the new value Alternately after you display the edit field you may use the dial and or the arrow keys to modify the field then press Enter to lock in the new value If you did not make programming errors and did not make any mistake while downloading your waveform segment s then the output should generate your desired waveform There are four parameters that are available for programming in this window Sample Clock Defines the sample clock frequency for the arbitrary waveform Information how to modify the sample clock is given in this chapter Amplitude Defines the amplitude of the arbitrary waveform Note that regardless of the amplitude setting the vertical resolution of which the waveform is generated is always 14 bits MENU e vibes Using the Instrument 3 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Offset Defines the offset value of the arbitrary waveform The offset and the amplitude can be freely programmed within a 10V window 5V to 5V rails Segment Number Defines which of the segments in the working memory is currently active at the output connector As was disc
261. rument in the chain as master and the other instruments as slaves Refer to Figure 3 30 and the following description to learn how to set 397 instruments as master and slaves 3 51 397 User Manual 3 52 1 Connect your instruments as shown in Figure 3 29 Make sure you designate the first instrument in the chain as master Also make sure the last slave is terminated with the 9 pin terminator 2 Select the Utility menu and scroll down to the Multi Inst Sync option Press Enter and the dialog box as shown in Figure 3 30 will appear 3 By default all instruments are designated Master On the slave units only scroll down to the Synchronization Properties group and press Enter Use the arrow keys to select the Slave option and press Enter to lock in the new state 4 Finally on the master unit only scroll up to the Couple State between Instruments group and press Enter Use the arrow keys to select the Active state and press Enter to lock in the new state Couple state between instruments Inactive O Active BRSE Synchronization Properties Choose the role you want for the this instrumet C Maste O Slave Start Position MODE SYNC OUT ARM COFF FUNC MOD TYPE BIT BREAKPOINT 1 RUN CONT POSITION SLOPE POSITIVE Figure 3 30 Setting up Master Slave Parameters If you executed the above procedure correctly all slave units will automatically change their couple state to Active
262. ruments because the output signals will not be synchronized The 397 has a special master slave synchronization feature that allows connection of multiple instruments in a daisy chain Not only that the channels are derived from the same master sample clock source but other signals are distributed from the master instrument which tightly control start phase and jitter Connecting multiple instruments in master slave configuration is extremely easy All you need is two types of cables the first being a standard BNC to BNC coax cable to feed the sample clock output and a 9 pin to 9 pin cable to feed the master to slave or slave to slave controls The master slave cable is supplied with your instrument however the BNC cable you can get from any store Figure 3 29 shows the connection between master and slave instruments Additional slave units can be daisy chained in a similar way What you have to remember is that SCLK OUT feeds an adjacent SCLK IN Also always have the last slave unit in the chain terminated with the special 9 pin terminator MASTER SLAVE A MASTER SLAVE CABLE LAST SLAVE TERMINATOR Figure 3 29 Wiring Diagram Master to Slave Hard wiring the instruments from the back is not enough You now have to set up the first inst
263. ry useful in applications such as mixer balancing where few micro volts could sway the balance either way Besides its normal continuous mode the 397 responds to a variety of trigger sources The output waveform may be gated triggered or generate a counted burst of waveforms A built in trigger generator having a programmable period can be used as a replacement of an external trigger source The internal trigger generator can be programmed with resolution of 7 digits The Model 397 generates arbitrary waveforms with 14 bits of vertical resolution Any waveform it generates must first be downloaded to waveform memory The arbitrary waveform memory is a bank of 14 bit words Each word represents a point on 1 7 397 User Manual 1 8 Memory Segmentation Frequency Agility Multi Instrument Synchronization the horizontal waveform scale Each word has a horizontal address that can range from 0 to 4 191 280 and a vertical address that can range from 8192 to 8191 14 bits Using a high speed clocking circuit the digital contents of the arbitrary waveform memory are extracted and routed to the Digital to Analog Converter DAC The DAC converts the digital data to an analog signal and the output amplifier completes the task by amplifying or attenuating the signal at the output connector There is no need to use the complete memory every time an arbitrary waveform is generated Waveform memory can be divided into up to 2048 smal
264. s Frequency 1kHz Waveform Square wave Amplitude Adjust for TTL level on 500 5 Connect the function generator output to the 397 rear panel TRIG IN connector 6 Configure the 397 channels 1 2 as follows Reset Modulation Mode FSK ON Output On Test Procedure 1 Verify FSK operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Square wave Period 1ms Max A 1 25MHz Min A 1MHz Test Results Pass Fail 2 Remove the cable from 397 channel 1 and connect to chan 2 3 Repeat the test procedure as above for chan 2 Test Results Pass Fail 6 18 Ramped FSK Maintenance and Performance Checks Modulated Waveforms Characteristics Nj NOTE Leave the same setup for the next test Equipment Oscilloscope LeCroy LT342 fitted with jitter package function generator Preparation Use the same preparation as in the previous test except make the following changes in the setup 1 Change the 397 FSK Type to RAMP 2 Change function generator output frequency to 200Hz Test Procedure 1 Verify FSK operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Ramped square Period 5ms Rise Fall Time 1ms Max A 1 25MHz Min A 1MHz Test Results Pass Fail 2 Remove the cable from 397 channel 1 and connect to chan 2 3 Repeat the test procedure as above for channel 2 Test Results Pass Fail Sweep Equipment Oscilloscope
265. s Chapter esent nien nnn ennt nne a en nnne S 4 3 Introduction to ArbEXplorer irt t eo ERES ERE ARRAS NR 4 3 Installing ATDEXDIOFGE ctae die qi a e etudes 4 3 Quillitig ATDEXDpIOTGT s cs e t e e e d o me ce eu 4 4 For the New and Advanced Users nenne 4 4 Conventions Used in This Manual nnn 4 4 The Opening SCHOEN sii eet Re HERR ER Dx tlie Intel tuba eii E UO D eu PEEL M eM dts 4 5 ArbExplorer Features 4 6 The Gontrol Panels iiti he hh De ree ted ented vei etate ei ove Wate E il e den 4 6 The Main Panel PT T ands 4 8 The Standard Waveforms Panel 4 10 The Arbitrary amp Sequence Panel 2 re seugabeuseneencuseuzebeusetesncustugebeuseneten 4 11 Using the Memory Partition Table eese nnn 4 13 Using the Waveform Studio e dada 4 15 The trigger PANG aso bli e o c oU Dee tss 4 19 The Modulation Panel 7 4 21 A a aa 4 21 PO Mv Mc MR O A O Bh os O e EET E 4 22 The Modulation Panel 2 4 23 A RA 4 23 e EE E 4 24 Ure e ETE 4 25 The Command Editor iti hri env aeons lr ls 4 28 The Wave Composer senes nest en nnn aa nenne enn enn en nenne rennen nnns 4 29 Oe eil Le EI 4 29 TNE MOOID T 4 36 The Waveform Gcreen 4 36 ilie EM COMPOST exi a etd te te titus yagi acacia eae esM ee OP ridus 4 38 ThexGommands bat A etie vier ere bee quanta eve recET eaten 4 38 397 User Manual Generating Waveforms Using the Equation Editor 4 43 N
266. s commands using the command editor This way you can assure that commands or syntax that you use in your application will behave exactly the same way as it responds to the editor commands A complete list of SCPI commands is available in Chapter 5 Being an arbitrary waveform generator the 397 has to be loaded The Wave with waveform data before it can start generating waveforms The Composer waveform generation and editing utility is part of ArbExplorer and is called The Waveform Composer This program gives you tools to create definitions for arbitrary waveforms It can also convert coordinates from other products such as oscilloscopes and use them directly as waveform data The program is loaded with many features and options so use the following paragraphs to learn how to create edit and download waveforms to the 397 using the Waveform Composer To launch the wave composer point and click on the WAVE button in the Panels bar Figure 4 15 shows an example of the wave composer The Wave Composer has main sections Commands bar Toolbar and Waveform screen Refer to Figure 4 15 throughout the description of these sections The Commands bar The commands bar provides access to standard Windows commands such as File and View In addition there are ArbExplorer specific commands such as Edit Wave and System In general clicking on one of the commands opens a dialog box with an additional list of commands Then clicking on an addit
267. s given below New Waveform The New Waveform command will remove the waveform from the screen If you made changes to the waveform area and use this command you should save your work before clearing the screen The New Waveform command is destructive to the displayed waveform Open Waveform The Open Waveform command will let you browse your disk for previously saved waveform files and load these waveforms to the waveform area This command is also very useful for converting waveform files to format that is acceptable by the Wave Composer Save Waveform The Save Waveform command will store your active waveform in your 397 directory as a binary file with a wvf extension If this is the first time you save your waveform the Save Waveform As command will be invoked automatically letting you select name location and format for your waveform file Save Waveform As Use the Save Waveform As command the first time you save your waveform It will let you select name location and format for your waveform file Print With this command you may print the active Waveform Window The standard printer dialog box will appear and will let you select printer setup or print the waveform page Exit The Exit command ends the current FM Composer session and takes you back to the Panels screen If you made changes to your waveform since it was last saved make sure to Save your work before you use this command ArbExplorer 4
268. s parallel to the X axis Now lets give the line some angle by typing Amplitude p 2 p 2000 Press Preview and see that the line slopes down It may still be not very interesting however pay close attention to the convention that is used in this equation You cannot type Amplitude p 2p 1000 like you would normally do in your notebook You must use the multiply sign otherwise you ll get a syntax error Now we ll try to generate a simple sine waveform Try this Amplitude p sin 10 Equation Samples ArbExplorerO 4 Press Preview and sorry you still get nothing on the screen The Wave Composer did not make a mistake The sine of 10 in radians is exactly what it shows You are unable to see the result because the line on your screen running across the O vertical point Y REMEMBER The equation must be a function of a single variable and that variable must be directly related to the Horizontal axis Scale setting Now try this Amplitude p sin omg p Still no good but now press the Adjust button and here is your sinewave So what s wrong Well if you ll give it a little amplitude it might help so do it now exactly as follows Amplitude p 28000 sin omg p There you go You should now see a perfect sine waveform with a period of 1000 points This is because you have asked the Equation Editor to compute the sine along p points p is the equation variable remember If you want to create 10 sine wavef
269. scribed below ArbExplorer The Control Panels Mode The Mode group lets you select between two shift options Hop and Ramped In hop mode the sample clock hops to the shift frequency without delays In ramped mode the sample clock ramps to the shift frequency at a rate determined by the Ramp Time parameter Click on the option you prefer to select between hop and ramped modes Parameters Allow adjustment of Ramp Time carrier sample clock frequency SCLK and shifted sample clock frequency SCLK2 parameters To access the required parameter click on the button below parameters sub group until the LED next to the required parameter turns on The value that is associated with the lit LED is displayed on the digital display You can use the dial keyboard or the T N keys to adjust the readout to the required setting After you modify the reading press Execute to update the 397 with the new reading Nj Note Normal color of the digital reading is dark blue If you modify the reading the color changes to a lighter shade of blue indicating that the 397 has not been updated yet with the new parameter Pressing Execute will update the instrument and will restore the color of the digital readout to dark blue indicating that the displayed value is the same as the generator setting Also note that the digital readout has an autodetect mechanism for the high and low limits You cannot exceed the limits if you are using the dial but only
270. selects an external source 5 25 397 User Manual lt INTernal gt selects the internal source Parameter type Discrete FREQuency RASTer SOURce Response and default The 397 will return EXT if an external source is selected or INT if the internal source is selected Default value is INT FREQuency RASTer DIVider lt divider gt Purpose The sample clock frequency for channel 2 can be divided by n In this case the sample clock for channel 1 will be X and the sample clock for channel 2 will be X n This command sets the dividing ratio for chamnel 2 e lt divider gt sets the dividing ratio for channel 2 Parameter type Numeric Parameter range divider 1 to 65535 FREQuency RASTer DlVider Response and default The 397 will return the present channel 2 sample clock frequency divider value Default value is 1 FSK FREQuency RASTer lt FM_sclk gt Purpose This command will set the shift sample clock frequency When set to operate in FSK mode the 397 will hop from carrier sample clock frequency to shifted sample clock frequency lt FSK_sclk gt will set the shifted sample clock frequency for the FSK mode Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt FSK_sclk gt 100e 3 to 12566 in units of samples per second FSK FREQuency RASTer Response and default The 397 will return the present shifted sample clock frequency value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 1kHz would be returned
271. slope Amplitude 1V div Connect 397 Channel 1 output to the oscilloscope input chan 1 Connect the 397 SYNC output to the oscilloscope input chan 2 Configure the 397 channels 1 2 as follows Reset Modulation Mode FM ON Modulating Wave Arbitrary Sync On Output On 5 Using ArbExplorer open the FM Composer and download the following waveform Wavelength 1000 points Waveform Sine wave Deviation 72MS s Test Procedure 1 Verify FM operation on the oscilloscope as follows PI Waveform Sine Period 1kHz Max A 1 5625MHz Min A 437 5kHz Test Results Pass Fail 2 Remove the cable from 397 channel 1 and connect to chan 2 3 Repeat the test procedure as above for channel 2 Test Results Pass Fail 6 22 Maintenance and Performance Checks Modulated Waveforms Characteristics AM Equipment Oscilloscope function generator Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 0 5 ms Trigger source Channel 2 positive slope Amplitude 1V div 2 Connect 397 Channel 1 output to the oscilloscope input chan 1 3 Connect the 397 SYNC output to the oscilloscope input chan 2 4 Configure the function generator as follows Waveform Sine wave Frequency 1 kHz Amplitude 5Vp p Offset 2 5V 5 Connect the function generator output to the 397 rear panel AM input 6 Configure the 397 channels 1 2 as follows Reset Modulation M
272. sm for the high and low limits You cannot exceed the limits if you are using the dial but only if you use the keypad In case you do the program will not let you download an illegal parameter and you ll be requested to correct your setting The Slope group lets you select edge sensitivity for the trigger input of the 397 If you click on Pos the instrument will trigger on the rising edge of the trigger signal Likewise if you click on Neg the instrument will trigger on the falling edge of the trigger signal The 397 can accept triggers from a number of sources External Internal or software command You must have a valid trigger signal applied to the rear panel trigger input to use the external trigger source option If you do not have an external source you can always use the internal trigger generator or press a front panel manual trigger to stimulate an output Click on one of the trigger source option buttons to select the required trigger source You can also program the internal trigger period after you point and click on Timer The Arm group is almost an orphan on the Trigger Panel This is the only function that actually will work in continuous mode only however since the arm commands cause interruption of the 396 output and arm control is done with the trigger input it was placed in the trigger section of ArbExplorer While modifying Arm commands bear in mind that the instrument must be in continuous mode only The arm f
273. st To reset the Model 397 to factory defaults use the Factory Rest option in the Utility menu Recommended test equipment for troubleshooting calibration and performance checking is listed below Test instruments other than those listed may be used only if their specifications equal or exceed the required characteristics Table 6 1 Recommended Test Equipment Equipment Model No Manufacturer Oscilloscope with jitter LT342 LeCroy package Distortion Analyzer 6900B Krohn Hite Digital Multimeter 2000 Keithley Freq Counter 6020 2 4 Tabor Electronics Spectrum Analyzer E4411 HP Pulse Generator with 8500 Tabor Electronics manual trigger Performance Check Procedures 6 6 Use the following procedures to check the Model 397 against the specifications A complete set of specifications is listed in Appendix A The following paragraphs show how to set up the instrument for the test what the specifications for the tested function are and what acceptable limits for the test are If the instrument fails to perform within the specified limits the instrument must be calibrated or tested to find the source of the problem Maintenance and Performance Checks Recommended Test Equipment Frequency Accuracy Equipment Counter Preparation 1 Configure the counter as follows Measurement function Freq A Termination 509 DC coupled 2 Connect the 397 Channel 1 output to the counter input channel A 3 Configure the 397 ch
274. st is a matter of practice and knowledge of the language in use There are other system considerations like address selection that have to be settled before programming the instrument These topics are discussed in later chapters Low level programming of the 397 is accomplished using SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments language Programming aspects are covered in Chapters 3 and 4 Supplied with the 397 is a PC software package called ArbExplorer This provides a user interface with a familiar windows interface which allows the user to interact with and control the 397 directly Details of how to use ArbExplorer are supplied in the following pages 1 21 397 User Manual 1 22 Chapter 2 Configuring the Instrument Title Page Installation GOV VIBW cintas tetas Quae di cd cues piece ese eau as 2 3 Unpacking and Initial Inspection ssssset nnns 2 3 Safety PACA e Si eai 2 3 Performance CHECKS PER P n 2 4 Power Requll ements iii tette t HA e a Ru esa OE eR ED deren e Ra EEN 2 4 Grounding ISecuirelfie BSc A 2 4 Long Term Storage or Repackaging for Shipment s 2 5 Preparation for U SO a a a a aaa a a e Eaa a a i aaria dae aaia aaa eae a eiai 2 5 Installation ii pr RE b a t eaaa 2 5 Installing Software H LL EE 2 6 Controlling the Instrument from Remote A 2 6 Connecting to a Remote interface aisla 2 6 Selecting a le El 2 7 GPIB Gonfiguftallor c reboot eH pc dai 2 8 USB COMguraO
275. standard waveforms user waveforms user waveform size sequence table channel 2 clock divider trigger start phase breakpoints Sample clock frequency reference source trigger modes sequence advance mode SYNC output FM FSK sweep arm start stop Multiple instruments can be connected together and synchronized to provide multi channel synchronization Phase leading edge offset between master and slave units is programmable Leading edge of master output trails the leading edge of the slave output by a programmable number of points Each slave can be programmed to have individual offset Waveform points 0 to 4 Meg points 397 User Manual Resolution and Accuracy Initial Skew SAMPLE CLOCK Sources Internal Range Resolution Accuracy Stability Reference Standard External External Level SAMPLE CLOCK MODULATION FM Built in Standard Waveforms Description Modulation Source Modulation Frequency Range Resolution Accuracy Modulating Frequency Distortion Deviation Range Advance Marker Output and Level Position 4 point lt 15ns depending on cable length and quality typically with 1 meter coax cables 100mS s to 125MS s 9 digits limited by 1uS s Same as internal reference Same as internal reference 20 000196 1 ppm TCXO initial tolerance over a 19 C to 29 C temperature range 1ppm C below 19 C and above 29 C 1ppm year aging rate 10MHz TTL 50 2 duty cycle From rear panel BNC DC t
276. t connector The trigger input is used to flag the 397 when to output carrier frequency trigger false or when it should switch to the shift frequency trigger true You may also use the FSK function from the front panel as long as you do your own calculation of carrier and shifted frequencies depending on the present sample clock frequency and waveform length Ramped FSK is the same as the FSK function except the output is ramped instead of switched to the shift frequency Ramp time is programmable with 3 digits from 100us to 1 second The FM function modulates the 397 sample clock frequency You can frequency modulate the output either with built in waveforms or download complex waveforms to the modulation memory Using the latest DDS technology the modulation is wide band and extremely linear FM can be used in continuous triggered and gated modes The 397 can generate two types of frequency modulation 1 Standard and 2 Arbitrary In standard mode the modulating waveform is selected from a built in library of 4 standard waveforms sine triangle square and ramped wave shapes In arbitrary mode the modulating signal is downloaded to the modulation waveform memory There are 20 000 points allocated specifically for the arbitrary memory that is used for arbitrary frequency modulation 397 User Manual Output Type Standard Fixed Waveforms Arbitrary User Waveforms Sequenced Waveforms The 397 can output three types of
277. t 5 Decimal value 32 Standard Event Status Bit ESB Summary Message This bit indicates whether or not one or more of the enabled ESB events have occurred since the last reading or clearing of the Standard Event Status Register Bit 6 Decimal value 64 Master Summary Status MSS Request Service RQS Bit This bit indicates if the device has at least one condition to request service The MSS bit is not part of the IEEE STD 488 1 status byte and will not be sent in response to a serial poll However the RQS bit if set will be sent in response to a serial poll Bit 7 Decimal value 128 Not used always set to 0 Remote Programming Reference IEEE STD 488 2 Common Commands and Queries User Reauest Command Error Execution Error Device Nenendent Frror Query Error Request Control Operation Complete Standard Event Status Reaister ESR I Power On DE O E oi O d Standard Event Status Reaist rielsla s 2 v o ESE lt value gt Output Queue Service 3 7 read by Serial Poll Request B 110 Status Byte Register Generation 3 7 read by STB ical OR Lo Service Request Enable Register zlelslalalzlalel E value Figure 5 5 SCPI Status Registers 5 61 397 User Manual Reading the Status Byte Register Clearing the Status Byte Register Service Request Enable Register SRE 5 62 The Status Byte summary register can be read with the STB common query The STB common query c
278. t and press a suffix 4 Press Enter to lock in the new value Alternately after you display the edit field you may use the dial and or the arrow keys to modify the field then press Enter to lock in the new value If you did not make programming errors and did not make any mistake while downloading your waveform segment s then the output should generate your desired waveform There are seven parameters that are available for programming in this window View Table Provides access to a sequence table If no table was yet defined you can define the sequence table from this menu You can also edit an existing sequence table from this command Information on editing the sequence table is given later Advance Mode Defines the advance mode for the sequence There are four advance mode options you can select from Automatic Stepped Single and Mixed Descriptions of the various advance modes is given later Note that advance mode depend on run mode and therefore if you selected continuous run mode for the 397 you will not see the Single advance mode in the advance mode options list Similarly if you selected triggered run mode Stepped and Mixed will be omitted from the list Using the Instrument Generating Sequenced Waveforms Advance Source Defines which of the triggers inputs will advance the sequence The advance source has no effect on Automatic advance source Sample Clock Programs the sample clock frequency for the
279. tart frequency set by the Sample CIk parameter to stop frequency set by Stop Sample Clk parameter Both the sweep start and the sweep stop frequencies control directly the sample clock generator at the rear panel sine output and indirectly the front panel outputs Sweep modulation is also available from the front panel outputs except the frequency must be computed from the start sample clock and the number of points that generate the start output waveform When you select sweep modulation the parameters as shown in Figure 3 24 and described in the following paragraphs will be available for modification cam xs A f LA Sweep Type Logarithmic ES Start Sample Clk CARRIER ARE BASE MODE SYNC OUT FUNC MOD TYPE BIT 1 RUN CONT POSITION O Figure 3 26 Sweep Parameters Sweep Type Defines the steps of which the sample clock increments or decrements from start to stop frequencies A choice is provided between linear and logarithmic steps If you select linear sweep the frequency range is divided to 1000 linear increments and the sample clock steps through these frequency increments within a time interval which is set by the sweep time parameter Likewise using the logarithmic sweep type the frequency span between the start and stop frequencies is divided by 1000 logarithmic steps Direction Defines the sweep direction UP sets sweep direction from start frequency to stop frequency DOWN reverses the sweep dir
280. tep SEQuence ADVance Response and default The 397 will return the AUTO STEP SING or MIX depending on the present sequence advance mode setting Default value is AUTO SEQuence ADVance SOURce EXTernal INTernal Purpose This command will select the sequence advance source The source of the event causing sequence advance can be specified by the user e lt EXTernal gt will set the external advance mode lt INTernal gt will set the internal advance mode SEQuence ADVance SOURce Response and default The 397 will return the EXT or INT depending on the present single sequence advance source setting Default value is INT SEQuence DEFine lt step_ gt lt segment_ gt lt _repeat gt lt mode gt Purpose This command will define sequence steps and their associated advance mode step will define the link number segment will select the segment for the above link e e i repeat will define how many times the selected segment will loop mode will assign the mixed mode bits for this sequence step 0 programs normal advance 1 programs trigger advance Step with a 0 bit assigned to it will advance automatically to the next step If 1 is assigned to a step the instrument will generate this step and its associated number of repeats continuously and only a valid trigger signal will advance this step to the next step Note that the mode parameter has no affect when the sequence
281. ter you have installed ArbExplorer on your computer read the following paragraphs to learn how to find your way around ArbExplorer s menus Once you are familiar with the basics you ll continue to learn about features programming and editing commands If you can t find the answer to a question in this guide call your distributor or the LeCroy customer support service near you and we ll gladly assist you with your problems For the Advanced User If you are already familiar with computer conventions and have basic knowledge of Windows programming you may want to skip some of the following paragraphs This manual uses certain typographical conventions to make it easier for you to follow instructions These conventions are de scribed in the following Enter or Press the Enter or Return key Esc Press the Escape key Alt F Press the Alt key and the key that follows simultaneously In this example the key that follows is F Ctrl S Press the Control key and the letter that follows simulta neously In this example the letter is S The control key also appears in the menus as a target sign 1 4 5 Press the Arrow key with the symbol pointing in the direction specified i e up down left or right Press the key for the character or word enclosed in angle brackets In this case the Plus sign key ArbExplorer The Opening Screen The Opening Screen Startup amp Communication Options I
282. the instrument over the GPIB are defined by the SCPI 1993 0 standard The SCPI standard defines a common language protocol It goes one step further than IEEE STD 488 2 and defines a standard set of commands to control every programmable aspect of the instrument It also defines the format of command parameters and the format of values returned by the instrument SCPI is an ASCII based instrument command language designed for test and measurement instruments SCPI commands are based on a hierarchical structure known as a tree system In this system associated commands are grouped together under a common node or root thus forming subsystems Part of the OUTPut subsystem is shown below to illustrate the tree system OUTPut FILTer LPASs NONE 25M 50M ALL STATe OFF ON OUTPut is the root keyword of the command FILTer and STATe are second level keywords LPASs is third level keyword A colon separates a command keyword from a lower level keyword 5 3 397 User Manual Command Format Command Separator 5 4 The format used to show commands in this manual is shown below FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum The command syntax shows most commands and some parameters as a mixture of upper and lowercase letters The uppercase letters indicate the abbreviated spelling for the command For shorter program lines send the abbreviated form For better program readability use the long form For ex
283. the output remains at the shift frequency as long as the level remains true The output will remain at carrier frequency as long as the FSK input remains TTL low false and at shifted frequency as long as the output remains TTL high true Using the Instrument Generating Modulated Waveforms Carrier Sample CIk This is the frequency of the sample clock as displayed in the standard waveform screens Note that SCLK value is shown in gray and will automatically change when you set up frequency of the standard waveform There is no direct access to SCLK setting when you program standard waveform frequency The SINE OUT connector at the rear panel generates sine waves only This output is derived from the sample clock generator and therefore its output is directly proportional to the SCLK setting There are differences how you set up FSK operation for standard and arbitrary waveforms These are explained and examples given in the following paragraphs Example 1 FSK Using This example will show how to generate FSK modulation using the Standard Waveforms standard waveforms The carrier frequency will be set to 1MHz and the shifted frequency to 1 5MHz We ll monitor the FSK modulation from the front panel outputs then compare the results to the rear panel sine output connector 1 Select a standard waveform from the standard waveforms and press the Frequency button Modify the frequency setting to display 1 000000MHz Observe and note that t
284. the present breakpoint value Default value is 0 INITiate CONTinuous OFF ON 0 1 Purpose This command will set the output in continuous operation and interrupted operation The trigger subsystem commands will affect the 397 only after it will be set to interrupted operation e ONor 1 will set the continuous mode OFF or O will set the interrupted mode Parameter type Discrete 5 43 397 User Manual INITiate CONTinuous Response to query version The 397 will return O if the output is interrupted or 1 if the output is continuous Default value is 1 TRIGger BURSIt OFF ON J0 1 Purpose This command will set the burst mode This command will affect the 397 only after it will be set to interrupted operation with the command INIT CONT OFF ON or 1 will set the burst mode on OFF or 0 will set the burst mode off Parameter type Discrete TRIGger BURSt Response and default The 397 will return 1 if the burst is on or O if the burst is off Default value is O TRIGger COUNt lt count gt Purpose This command will set the burst counter e lt count gt will set the count number Parameter type Numeric integer only Parameter range lt count gt 1 to 1 Meg TRIGger COUNt Response and default The 397 will return the present count value Default value is 1 TRIGger GATE OFF ON J0 1 Purpose This command will set the gate mode This command will affect the 397 only after it will be set to interrupted operation
285. tings and information how to change them is given in the following Configuring the Instrument y Selecting a Remote interface Nj Note Configuring your LAN setting does not automatically select the LAN as your active remote interface Setting a remote interface is done from the Select interface menu Information how to select and Interface is given herinbefore EN e baue rmi I coat Physical Address 00 C0 17 41 00 00 X Host Name FL397 PROT e 8 ER COLE d 255 255 255 0 c vtot cotemay 132 168 oam gt o E D Q Check with your network adninistrator IG IIT o conflicts with other ne TM ALL SA 1 ARE TYPE BIT 1 START Pt 0 IG POSITION o SLOPE POSITIVE MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG Figure 2 11 LAN Configuration Screen There are three LAN parameters in this screen that can be modified and adjusted specifically to match your network setting These are described below Consult your network administrator for the setting that will best suit your application e IP address The unique computer readable address of a device on your network An IP address typically is represented as four decimal numbers separated by periods for example 192 160 0 233 Refer to the next section Choosing a Static IP Address e Subnet mask A code that helps the network device determine whether another device is on the same network or a different network e Gateway IP The IP address of a device that acts as a gateway which is a
286. to display the root menu 2 Press Waveforms the display as shown in Figure 3 4 will open 3 Press one of the soft keys to select the required waveform Note the waveform screen shows a sine waveform The sine is the default waveform After you select a different waveform type the screen will be updated with a new symbol which is associated with the new type Nj Note The picture in the 397 LCD display is an icon only The actual output waveform may look entirely different You should be careful not to confuse waveform frequency with sample clock frequency The waveform frequency parameter is valid for standard waveforms only and controls waveform frequency at the output connector The sample clock frequency parameter is valid for arbitrary and sequenced waveforms only and defines the frequency of which the generator clocks data points Standard waveform frequency is measured in units of Hz Arbitrary waveform sample clock frequency is measured in units of S s samples per second The frequency of a given arbitrary waveform at the output connector is dependant on sample clock frequency the number of data points and other specific waveform definitions The frequency of the output waveform will change only if a standard waveform is generated First select a standard waveform as described earlier and then proceed with frequency modification Observe Figure 3 5 and modify frequency using the following procedure The index numbers in Fig
287. trument in triggered sweep the instrument will idle on the sweep start frequency and execute one sweep cycle when triggered Refer to the appropriate section in this manual to learn more about triggered sweep Trig Slope The Slope buttons let you select edge sensitivity for the trigger input of the 397 If you click on Pos the instrument will trigger on the rising edge of the trigger signal Likewise if you click on Neg the instrument will trigger on the falling edge of the trigger signal The Utility Panel The Utility panel as shown in Figure 4 12 is invoked by pressing the UTIL button The Utility panel provides access to general instrument references that are not directly related to waveform generation Also available in this panel are some system commands such as Reset Instrument and CLS Clear Error Queue The Reset Instrument button is needed in places where you get stuck with instrument programming and want to start from a fresh and know state The default parameters are described in the programming section of this manual There are five groups in the Utility panel Multi Instrument Control for synchronizing multiple instruments to one master instrument Inter Channel Offset for controlling phase offset between channels Filter for controlling the filter state at the output connectors Reference Source for controlling the reference source for the internal clocks that are used for generating the waveforms and System that has
288. ts used by the instrument is critical to correct sweep operation For example if you set your start frequency at 50MHz the 397 can use only two waveform points While the instrument can generate a fairly nice sine waveform at 50MHz by using just two points and special filters the same two points will look like square waveforms if the sample clock is reduced below 10MS s 2 As a reverse example if you sweep modulate the output from a start frequency of 150kHz the generator automatically sets the SCLK to 76 8MS s and the number of waveform points to 512 If you try to sweep up from this point then your maximum frequency will be 195 312kHz 100MS s 512 Pts 195 312kHz Therefore and due to these limitations it is recommended using the sweep modulation in conjunction with arbitrary waveforms because you are in complete control of the number of points and the sample clock frequency you are using to generate your waveform Using the Instrument Generating Modulated Waveforms A It is also recommended to use the SINE OUT at the rear panel because the start and stop frequency settings are available at this output at nominal values without the need to compute values for different waveform types Sweep Time Defines the time interval that it takes for the 397 output to execute one complete sweep The sweep time is generated with an asynchronous free running time interval generator that has programmable intervals from 1ms to 1000 s
289. u to stop generating waveforms at a specific breakpoint location then continue generating the waveform only when you are ready and the waveform will resume operation from the last breakpoint position There are three parameters you can adjust for this function State Turns arm mode on and off Slope Defines edge sensitivity for the trigger input and Breakpoint Position Defines where the waveform will stop Note that each channel can be programmed to stop at a unique breakpoint position The Arm parameters are shown in Figure 3 13 ARM Parameters state Slope Positive Breakpoints Channeli 1 Channel 2 1 BASE MODE SYNC OUT FUNC ARB TYPE BIT 1 RUN CONT POSITION amp Figure 3 13 Arm Parameters Lontinuous Triggered Gated 3 19 397 User Manual Using the Manual Trigger Using the SYNC Output 3 20 The manual trigger allows you to trigger or gate the 397 directly from the front panel This button is active only when the generator is placed in external trigger or arm modes The MAN TRIG button is a second function to the Enter button and can be used only when the display is not in editing mode For safety reasons every time you turn the 397 OFF and ON the SYNC output defaults to OFF If you want to use the SYNC output you must turn it on immediately after you power up the generator You can turn the SYNC on using the ON OFF SYNC hot key as was explained earl
290. ude Level Adjuster Start pts o Max 8131 Cycles Manual Original Preview End pts 1023 Min Tea h C Auto _Defaut_ Equation Amplitude p Remove Store Browse Operands ESSI 6000 sin 100 omg p 1200 cos 110 omg p 1200 cos 90 omg p ll I 255 S11 767 1023 Points Figure 4 28 Using the Editor to Build Amplitude Modulated Signal With Upper and Lower Combining Waveforms 4 52 Sidebands The last but not least powerful feature allows you to combine waveforms which you previously stored on your hard disc You can write mathematical expressions that contain waveforms simple operands and trigonometric functions similar to the example given below If you want to use waveforms in your equations you must first generate these waves and store them on your hard disk You identify waveforms by adding the wav extension as shown in the example below Amplitude p Sine wav sin omg p 10 Noise wav 1000 The above equation will generate amplitude modulated waveform with added noise The following steps demonstrate how to create store and combine waveforms using this equation Step 1 Create and store sine wav Invoke the Equation Editor and type the following equation Ampl p 4000 sin omg p Press OK and then select the Save Waveform As from the File command Save this file using the name Sine wav Step 2 Create and store Noise wav From t
291. unction requires definition of breakpoints Additional information on the arm function is given in Chapter 3 To turn ARM on and off click on the State button Select the Position LED to program breakpoint position The Positive on Negative slope options will determine edge sensitivity for the trigger input ArbExplorer The Control Panels The Modulation The Modulation functions were designed over two separate panels Panel 1 as shown in Figures 4 10 and 4 11 The panels are invoked by pressing the MOD1 or MOD2 buttons on the panels menu These panels provide access to all modulation functions and their respective run modes and parameters The modulation functions that are available on both panels are FM frequency modulation AM amplitude modulation FSK frequency shift keying and Sweep Using ArbExplorer modulation is programmed simultaneously for both channels except for AM where each channel can be programmed separately When modulation run is other than continuous the instrument generates non modulated carrier frequency until a valid stimuli signal is applied Each of the modulation panels has a different set of functions and parameters These groups are described below Figure 4 10 The Modulation Panel 1 FM The FM group contains parameters for controlling the sample clock To turn the FM function on and off click on the State button in this group The various controls in the FM group are described below Wave Det
292. ure 3 5 correspond to the procedure steps in the following description 1 Press the Frequency soft key to select the frequency parameter 2 Use the numeric keypad to program the new frequency value 3 Press M k x1 or m to terminate the modification process Alternately you can modify the frequency value with the dial and arrow keys but then the termination of the process is by pressing Enter only Using the Instrument Changing the Sample Clock Frequency AS D 3 ES an DE NC OU TYPE BIT BREAKPOINT 1 POSITION 9 SLOPE POSITIVE Figure 3 5 Modifying Output Frequency e Note If you use the dial or arrow keys to modify the frequency parameter the output is updated immediately as soon as you modify the parameter The final value will be locked in as soon as you press Enter If you choose to leave the old value press Cancel to terminate the process and to discard of any change made to this parameter The frequency of the sample clock will affect the output waveform Changing the only if arbitrary or sequenced waveforms are generated First select Sample Clock an arbitrary waveform as described earlier and then proceed with Frequency sample clock frequency modification Observe Figure 3 6 and modify the sample clock using the following procedure The index numbers in Figure 3 6 correspond to the procedure steps in the following description 3 11 397 User Manual X MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG a BIT t
293. ussed earlier the working memory can be divided to 2k segments and different waveforms loaded in each segment Any segment is available at the output connector only if it has been selected to be the active segment The segment selection field lets you select any segment from 1 to n regardless if it contains waveform data or not so be careful when you select a segment number as it may be empty and no output will be generated Delete Segments Allows distractive removal of all segments from the memory In fact this command does not erase the memory but only removes the table that defines start and stop for each segment location If you have recorded your segment sizes you can always re define the segment table which will restore the original waveforms in each segment There is however no way back if you perform a download action after you delete the segment table 397 WAVEFORM GENERATOR SEH pl pp 2 340 Upp 100nUde ERED EXT TYPE BIT 1 START Pt POSITION O SLOPE POSITIVE Figure 3 17 Programming Arbitrary Waveform Parameters 3 25 397 User Manual Generating Sequenced Waveforms Waveform Studio Channel 1 gt In general the Model 397 cannot by itself create sequenced waveforms If you want to use sequenced waveforms you must first load them into the instrument The 397 is supplied with waveform creation and editing called ArbExplorer Besides waveform creation ArbExplorer has instrument contr
294. ve read all errors from the queue the generator responds with a 0 No error message If more than 30 errors have occurred the last error stored in the queue is replaced with 350 Queue Overflow No additional errors are stored until you remove errors from the queue If no errors have occurred when you read the error queue the generator responds with 0 No error The error queue is cleared when power has been shut off or after a CLS command has been executed The RST command does not clear the error queue Use the following command to read the error queue SYSTem ERRor Errors have the following format the error string may contain up to Remote Programming Reference IEEE STD 488 2 Common Commands and Queries 80 characters 102 Syntax error A complete listing of the errors that can be detected by the generator is given below 100 Command error When the generator cannot detect more specific errors this is the generic syntax error used 101 Invalid Character A syntactic element contains a character which is invalid for that type 102 Syntax error Invalid syntax found in the command string 103 Invalid separator An invalid separator was found in the command string A comma may have been used instead of a colon or a semicolon In some cases where the generator cannot detect a specific separator it may return error 100 instead of this error 104 Data type error The parser recognized a data
295. vides access to gated mode parameters D Burst Provides access to burst mode parameters C Utility Provides access to 397 Factory Reset Remote Setup Multi Instrument synchronization and System parameters D Outputs Provides access to output parameters sync properties and start phase offset between channels For safety reasons main outputs default setting is OFF The Enabling the outputs e be turned on and of using either the e keys or from Outputs the Output Menu Observe Figure 3 3 and disable or enable the 3 8 main outputs using the following procedure The same procedure can be used for enabling and disabling the SYNC output The numbers on Figure 3 3 correspond to the procedure steps in the following description 1 2 E 397 WAVEFORM GENERATOR While not editing any parameter select the channel you want to turn on using the PROGRAM CH1 or CH2 keys Press ON OFF OUTPUT or SYNC to toggle main and sync output on and off 1 2 1 De a aoe DO Jan ODO ODOS x CUM w MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG Selecting a Waveform Type Using the Instrument 3 Selecting a Waveform Type Alternately the outputs can be turned on and off from the Outputs sub menu Use the following procedure to open the Outputs dialog box press to toggle output state 3 Press TOP to display the root menu 4 Press Outputs to open the Outputs dialog box as shown in Figure 3 3 5 Use the dial or arrow keys to access the
296. w parameter Pressing Execute will update the instrument and will restore the color of the digital readout to dark blue indicating that the displayed value is the same as the generator setting Also note that the digital readout has an autodetect mechanism for the high and low limits You cannot exceed the limits if you are using the dial but only if you use the keypad In case you do the program will not let you download an illegal parameter and you ll be requested to correct your setting The Run Mode group provides access to the various trigger options of the modulation functions Note that the run modes that are shown on this panel behave differently than the Main Panel run modes For example if you place the instrument in triggered FM the instrument will idle on the carrier frequency and execute one FM cycle when triggered Refer to the appropriate section in this manual to learn more about triggered FM The Trig Slope group let you select edge sensitivity for the trigger input of the 397 If you click on Pos the instrument will trigger on the rising edge of the trigger signal Likewise if you click on Neg the instrument will trigger on the falling edge of the trigger signal The FSK group contains parameters for controlling the FSK function To turn the FSK function on and off click on the State button in this group There are two other sub groups in the FSK block Mode and Parameters The various controls in the FSK group are de
297. what we get there to what we see on the front panel Remove the cable from the main output connector and connect to the rear panel SINE OUT connector Here is what you should expect to see when you check this output Carrier waveform is around 1V into 500 carrier frequency is 64MHz deviated 3 2MHz above and below the carrier frequency setting modulating waveform frequency is 100Hz This example will show how to generate frequency modulation using the standard waveforms and the Arbitrary FM Mode The output frequency will be set to 2MHz Deviation Range to 100kHz and 100Hz sine as the modulating waveform We ll monitor the frequency modulation from the front panel outputs and then compare the results to the rear panel sine output connector Before we start setting up the modulation parameters we need to get some information from the instrument Do the following Select the Sine waveform from the Standard Waveform library and Using the Instrument Generating Modulated Waveforms then program the Frequency parameter to be 2MHz Observe and note that the SCLK parameter is showing 64MS s Note that in the standard waveform mode the SCLK parameter is set automatically by the instrument and cannot be modified directly The information that we need from this display is the number of points that the 397 requires to generate 2MHz We can find this out from SCLK Frequency relationship 64M 2M 32 points Note this number It will be requir
298. when the level is logic low Trigger level for this input is TTL The trigger input is common to both channels Therefore if the 397 is placed in trigger mode both channels share the same mode and the trigger input causes both channels to start generating waveforms at the same time Phase relationship between channels is tightly controlled in trigger mode You should expect both channels to start generating waves with exactly the same start phase Further control of leading edge offset between channels is also provided The same input is used in FSK mode where the output hops between two frequencies carrier and shifted frequencies The output generates carrier frequency when the FSK input is false and shifted frequency when the FSK input is true The trigger input is also used as stop and start input when the 397 is placed in Arm mode 397 User Manual SINE OUT REF IN SCLK OUT SCLK IN MASTER SLAVE This BNC connector outputs dc coupled fixed level 1Vpk pk into 500 sine waveforms This output is derived directly from the sample clock generator and is active at all times regardless of present operating mode of the 397 The frequency of the sine output is programmed using the sample clock parameter Frequency agility and modulation affect this output directly The sine waveform output is programmed to 125MHz so it may serve as an additional output to those available on the front panel This BNC connector accepts 10MHz
299. which will loop 15 times segment 4 looping 2 times segment 1 looping 7 times segment 2 once and segment 3 looping 4 times The Adv bits on links 2 and 5 are set to 1 and therefore external triggers are required for the sequencer to step through these links Y HINT The 397 has two separate sequence generators one for each channel If the 397 is programmed to continuous run mode make sure both channels have the same sequence length for inter channel synchronization For triggered run mode each channel can be programmed for a unique sequence length The control buttons on the left of the Sequence Table have the same functionality as for the Segment Table ArbExplorer The Control Panels Use the Append key to add a step at the end of the sequence list Use the Insert key to insert a step at the cursor location The Delete key is used for deleting a step at the cursor position Click on the Close to discard of the contents of the dialog box without saving your last actions and to remove the sequence Table from the screen but click on the Save key if you want just to save your work before you close the dialog box The Download key has double action it will download the sequence table to the instrument and will save the contents of your table so the next time you open this table it will have the same contents as you saved in your previous session The Trigger Panel The Trigger panel as shown in Figure 4 9 is invoked by press
300. will generate erroneous frequencies The SCLK sub group provides selection of internal or external reference for this clock The internal option is the default and is recommended for most applications If you select the external source for the SCLK signal you must connect a valid signal to the rear panel SCLK input Refer to Appendix A for information on valid SCLK clock parameters System Commands in this sub group will let you Reset the entire instrument to factory defaults and clear the error queue CLS if you made programming errors and want to remove the error list from the queue The Command Editor is an excellent tool for learning low level programming of the 397 Invoke the Command Editor from the System menu at the top of the screen Dialog box as shown in Figure 4 14 will pop up If you press the Download button the function call in the Command field will be sent to the instrument Command Editor i x r Command E ditor Command Add Errors query Iv vol 5 freq 10 7e5 in Download Response Remove Line m History Buffer Clear Import Export Download Figure 4 14 The Command Editor ArbExplorer The Wave Composer Low level SCPI commands and queries can be directly sent to the 397 from the Command field and the instrument will respond to queries in the Response field The command editor is very useful while developing your own application Build your confidence or test variou
301. will select slope sensitivity for the sweep trigger input e POSitive will select rising edge e NEGative will select falling edge Parameter type Discrete SWEep TRIGger SLOPe Response and default The 397 will return POS or NEG depending on its present setting Default is POS SWEep MARKer mark sclk Purpose This command will set the marker sample clock frequency for the sweep mode mark sclk will set the marker sample clock frequency Parameter type Numeric 5 30 Remote Programming Reference SOURce Subsystem Parameter range mark sclk 100e 3 to 12566 in units of samples per second SWEep MARKer Response and default The 397 will return the present sweep sample clock frequency value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 1kHz would be returned as 1E3 positive numbers are unsigned Default value is 64e6 VOLTage lt ampI gt MINimum MAXimum Purpose This command programs the peak to peak amplitude of the output waveform The amplitude is calibrated when the source impedance is 500 lt ampl gt sets the amplitude e lt MINimum gt sets the amplitude to its lowest value e lt MAXimum gt sets the amplitude to its highest value Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt ampl gt 10e 3 to 10 in units of volts lt MINimum gt 10e 3 in units of volts lt MAXimum gt 10 in units of volts VOLTage Response to query version The 397 will return the present amplitude
302. with the command INIT CONT OFF e ON or 1 will set the gate mode on e OFF or 0 will set the gate mode off Parameter type Discrete TRIGger GATE Response and default The 397 will return 1 if the gate is on or 0 if the gate is off Default value is 0 5 44 Remote Programming Reference TRIGger Subsystem TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative Purpose This command will set the edge sensitivity for the trigger input e lt POSitive gt will set the positive edge e lt NEGative gt will set the negative edge Parameter type Discrete TRIGger SLOPe Response and default The 397 will return POS or NEG depending on the present trigger setting Default value is POS TRIGger SOURce ADVance EXTernal INTernal Purpose This command will set the advance source for the trigger mode lt EXTernal gt will select the external input e lt INTernal gt will select the internal trigger generator Parameter type Discrete TRIGger SOURce ADVance Response and default The 397 will return EXT or INT depending on the present trigger source setting Default value is INT TRIGger TIMer lt interval gt Purpose This command will set the period for the internal trigger generator lt interval gt will set the timer of the internal trigger generator Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt interval gt 100e 3 to 2e6 in units of Hz TRIGger TIMer Response and default The 397 will return the present internal trigger timer value

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Solaris 9 Installation Guide  stop bull  Virtual VNC Console KE8220 User Manual  202b10168980 u owner`s manual manual de instrucciones english  appendix xi cdap smart card user manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file